FREQUENCY

INVERTER

3VFMAC-DSP 6P ASYNC
(Asynchronous)

3VFMAC-DSP 6P SYNC
(Synchronous)

Installation • Assembly • Commissioning

Use • Maintenance • Repair

Technical Manual
V0.01 – 04/2013
English /
MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN
Item: 0000003005
 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

ÍNDICE

1. GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................ 6
1.1. Scope of the manual ...................................................................................................................... 6
1.2. Use guideline of this manual............................................................................................................ 6
1.3. Recipients ..................................................................................................................................... 6
1.4. Document structure ....................................................................................................................... 6
1.5. Liability exclusions ......................................................................................................................... 6
1.6. Copyright ...................................................................................................................................... 6
1.7. Symbols ....................................................................................................................................... 6
2. SAFETY INFORMATION ....................................................................................................................... 7
2.1. General ........................................................................................................................................ 7
2.2. Inverter use .................................................................................................................................. 7
2.3. Product safety ............................................................................................................................... 7
2.4. Requirements for staff .................................................................................................................... 7
2.5. Commissioning .............................................................................................................................. 7
2.6. Working on the inverter. Dangers due to residual voltage ................................................................... 7
2.7. Modifications/actions on the inverter ................................................................................................ 7
2.8. Duties for the installer/maintenance staff.......................................................................................... 8
3. GENERAL OVERVIEW OF THE 3VFMAC-DSP 6P.................................................................................... 9
3.1. Application field ............................................................................................................................. 9
3.2. Functional description ..................................................................................................................... 9
3.2.1. General features .................................................................................................................... 9
3.2.2. Control system .................................................................................................................... 10
3.2.3. Operating modes.................................................................................................................. 10
3.2.4. Parameterisation and monitoring............................................................................................ 10
3.3. Outstanding parts of the equipment ............................................................................................... 11
3.3.1. LEDs................................................................................................................................... 11
3.3.1.1. LED Bank 1: Inputs for control board commands and contactor reading .............................. 11
3.3.1.2. LED Bank 2: Input for the rescue signal and voltage-free outputs ....................................... 13
3.3.1.3. LED Bank 3: Indicators ................................................................................................. 13
3.3.1.4. LED Run ...................................................................................................................... 14
3.3.1.5. LED “DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE” ...................................................................................... 14
3.3.2. Fuses.................................................................................................................................. 15
3.3.2.1. Fuse F1 ....................................................................................................................... 15
3.3.2.2. Fuse F2 (1A) ................................................................................................................ 16
3.3.2.3. Fuses F3 (1A), F4 (1A) .................................................................................................. 16
3.3.3. Relays + Triac ..................................................................................................................... 16
3.3.4. Monitoring and Programming Interface ................................................................................... 18
3.4. Mains power connections .............................................................................................................. 19
3.5. Input command connections.......................................................................................................... 22
3.6. Communication Interfaces ............................................................................................................ 23
3.7. Models........................................................................................................................................ 24
4. GENERAL DIMENSIONS .................................................................................................................... 25
5. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS.................................................................................................................. 26
5.1. Asynchronous .............................................................................................................................. 26
6. ADDITIONAL ELEMENTS ................................................................................................................... 28
6.1. Encoder ...................................................................................................................................... 28
6.1.1. Industrial encoder (asynchronous motors only) ........................................................................ 29
6.1.2. Low cost encoder (asynchronous motors only) ......................................................................... 31
6.1.3. Absolute/sinusoidal encoder (synchronous motors only) ............................................................ 32
6.2. Weighing control: VK2P (asynchronous only)................................................................................... 36

V0.01 – 04/2013 2 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

6.2.1. Description .......................................................................................................................... 36

6.2.2. Requirements ...................................................................................................................... 36
6.2.3. Parameterisation .................................................................................................................. 36
6.2.4. Viewing............................................................................................................................... 36
7. Monitoring ........................................................................................................................................ 37
7.1. General ...................................................................................................................................... 37
7.2. Console handling ......................................................................................................................... 37
7.3. Asynchronous version monitoring .................................................................................................. 40
7.4. Synchronous version monitoring .................................................................................................... 41
7.4.1. Block 0: main block .............................................................................................................. 42
7.4.2. Block 1: sinusoidal and absolute encoder ................................................................................ 43
7.4.3. Block 2: current data ............................................................................................................ 43
8. PARAMETERS .................................................................................................................................... 44
8.1. General ...................................................................................................................................... 44
8.2. Console handling in programming mode ......................................................................................... 44
8.3. Parameters of asynchronous version .............................................................................................. 47
8.4. Parameters of synchronous version ................................................................................................ 52
9. Control of the inverter ...................................................................................................................... 60
9.1. Inputs ........................................................................................................................................ 61
9.1.1. Emergency stop (contactors’ reading) ..................................................................................... 61
9.1.2. Run .................................................................................................................................... 61
9.1.3. Rated speed / Approach speed ............................................................................................... 61
9.1.4. 2nd Speed Bank .................................................................................................................... 62
9.1.5. Inspection speed .................................................................................................................. 62
9.1.6. 2nd Acceleration Bank............................................................................................................ 62
9.1.7. Run direction ....................................................................................................................... 63
9.1.8 Error reset/reading of brake microswitches/reading of overspeed governor interlocking coil state
(EN81+A3 amendment) ................................................................................................................. 63
9.1.8.1. Error Reset Function ..................................................................................................... 64
9.1.8.2. Function reading of brake microswitches ......................................................................... 65
9.1.8.3. Reading of overspeed governor interlocking coil state (EN81 + A3) .................................... 65
9.1.9. Rescue signal (EM) ............................................................................................................... 65
9.2. Voltage-free outputs .................................................................................................................... 66
9.2.1. Relay of speed limit/Interlocking of overspeed governor/Monitor of activity (KRL1) ...................... 66
9.2.1.1. Relay of speed limit ...................................................................................................... 67
9.2.1.2. Overspeed governor Interlocking/Release ........................................................................ 67
9.2.1.3. Inverter state monitoring .............................................................................................. 67
9.2.2. Contactors’ control triac (KRL2) (*) ........................................................................................ 68
9.2.3. Relay of brake control (KRL3) (*) ........................................................................................... 68
9.3. Sequence.................................................................................................................................... 69
10. MANAGEMENT OF ERRORS .............................................................................................................. 72
10.1. Error Reset ................................................................................................................................ 72
10.1.1 Autoreset ........................................................................................................................... 72
10.1.2 External Reset of an Error (Terminal 19 connector XC2) ........................................................... 72
10.1.3. Exceptions ......................................................................................................................... 72
10.2. Actions for responding to errors ................................................................................................... 73
10.3. Description of the Errors ............................................................................................................. 74
10.3.1. General errors.................................................................................................................... 74
10.3.2. Parameterising Errors ......................................................................................................... 84
10.3.3. Encoder Errors ................................................................................................................... 85
10.3.4. Autotuning Errors ............................................................................................................... 89
10.3.5. Sensor adjustment errors .................................................................................................... 92
11. AJDUSTMENT AND COMMISSIONING OF ASYNCHRONOUS INVERTERS (ASYNC) ............................ 93
11.1. Check of Connections ................................................................................................................. 93
11.1.1. Inverter ............................................................................................................................ 93
11.1.2. Connection de VK2P weighing system (Optional) .................................................................... 96
11.1.3. Brake ................................................................................................................................ 97
11.1.4. Encoder............................................................................................................................. 97

V0.01 – 04/2013 3 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

11.2. Initial Check of Parameters ......................................................................................................... 99

11.3. Check of encoder, current sensors and run direction ....................................................................... 99
11.4. Adjustment of INT.00 and INT.01............................................................................................... 100
11.5. Adjustment of rated speed (TR1.00) ........................................................................................... 101
11.6. Adjustment of low speed (TR1.01) ............................................................................................. 101
11.7. Adjustment of S-curves ............................................................................................................ 102
11.7.1. Standard curves ............................................................................................................... 103
11.7.2. Sinusoidal curves ............................................................................................................. 104
11.7.3. Which curve type do we have to choose?............................................................................. 105
11.7.4. Adjustment process for standard curves in open-loop mode ................................................... 105
11.7.5. Adjustment process for standard curves in closed-loop mode ................................................. 106
11.7.6. Adjustment process for sinusoidal curves in open-loop mode ................................................. 107
11.7.7. Adjustment process for sinusoidal curves in closed-loop mode ............................................... 108
11.8. Adjustment of levelling ............................................................................................................. 109
11.8.1. Stopping time (RSN.05) .................................................................................................... 109
11.8.2. Load compensation (RSN.06) ............................................................................................. 109
11.8.3. Load compensation and levelling adjustment ....................................................................... 109
11.8.3.1. Load compensation and levelling adjustment in open-loop (without encoder) ................... 110
11.8.3.2. Load compensation and levelling adjustment in closed-loop (with encoder) ...................... 111
11.9. Adjustment of short floors ......................................................................................................... 114
11.9.1. What is a short floor? ........................................................................................................ 114
11.9.2. Adjustment aim................................................................................................................ 114
11.9.3. How to adjust a short floor? ............................................................................................... 114
12. SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS .............................................................................................................. 116
12.1. Checks of Connections .............................................................................................................. 116
12.1.1. Inverter .......................................................................................................................... 116
12.1.2. Brake .............................................................................................................................. 119
12.1.2.1. Brake-varistor filter................................................................................................... 120
12.1.2.2. Brake microswitches ................................................................................................. 120
12.1.3. Encoder........................................................................................................................... 121
12.2. Inverter adjustment ................................................................................................................. 124
12.2.1. Control system description ................................................................................................ 124
12.2.2. Process general overview .................................................................................................. 125
12.2.3. Sinusoidal encoder check .................................................................................................. 126
12.2.4. Initial review of parameters ............................................................................................... 126
12.2.5. Absolute encoder check ..................................................................................................... 126
12.2.6. Autotuning ...................................................................................................................... 127
12.2.6.1. Parameters before autotuning .................................................................................... 129
12.2.6.2. Process execution ..................................................................................................... 130
12.2.7. Adjustment of speed control and current filter...................................................................... 132
12.2.8. Check of the run direction ................................................................................................. 133
12.2.9. Adjustment of S- curves .................................................................................................... 134
12.2.9.1. Standard curves ....................................................................................................... 135
12.2.9.2. Sinusoidal curves...................................................................................................... 135
12.2.9.3. Which type of curve to choose? .................................................................................. 136
12.2.9.4. Adjustment process for standard curves ...................................................................... 136
12.2.9.5. Adjustment process for sinusoidal curves..................................................................... 137
12.2.10. Adjustment of levelling .................................................................................................... 138
12.2.10.1. Stopping time (RSN.05) ........................................................................................... 138
12.2.10.2. Levelling adjustment ............................................................................................... 138
12.2.11. Adjustment of short floors ............................................................................................... 141
12.2.11.1. What is a short floor? .............................................................................................. 141
12.2.11.2. Adjustment aim ...................................................................................................... 141
12.2.11.3. How to adjust a short floor? ..................................................................................... 141
12.2.12. Adjustments of position control. Starting and stopping ........................................................ 143
12.2.13. Adjustments of brake ...................................................................................................... 144
12.2.13.1. Opening and closing times. Reading of the machine brake microswitches ....................... 144
12.2.13.2. Motor power failure ................................................................................................. 145
13. OTHER SPECIAL FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................ 147
13.1. Adjustment of sensors .............................................................................................................. 147
13.1.1. General ........................................................................................................................... 147
13.1.2. Process execution ............................................................................................................. 147
13.1.3. Errors of adjustment of sensors.......................................................................................... 148

V0.01 – 04/2013 4 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.2. Test Mode (asynchronous motors only) ....................................................................................... 148

13.2.1. General ........................................................................................................................... 148
13.2.2. Process execution ............................................................................................................. 149
13.3. 3VF Rescue Modes ................................................................................................................... 150
13.3.1. General ........................................................................................................................... 150
13.3.2. DSP Rescue-5 batteries ..................................................................................................... 150
13.3.2.1. Wiring (synchronous and asynchronous)...................................................................... 151
13.3.2.2. Parameterisation in asynchronous motor version .......................................................... 152
13.3.2.3. Parameterisation in synchronous motor version ............................................................ 153
13.3.2.4. Process description ................................................................................................... 153
13.3.3. DSP Rescue-4 batteries ..................................................................................................... 155
13.3.3.1. Wiring ..................................................................................................................... 155
13.3.3.2. Parameterisation ...................................................................................................... 157
13.3.3.3. Process description ................................................................................................... 157
13.3.4. DSP-UPS Rescue (without batteries) ................................................................................... 159
13.3.4.1. Wiring ..................................................................................................................... 159
13.3.4.2. Parameterisation ...................................................................................................... 161
13.3.4.3. Process Description ................................................................................................... 162
13.4. A3 Amendment ........................................................................................................................ 165
13.4.1. A3 Amendment for asynchronous motors (ASYNC) ............................................................... 166
13.4.1.1. Parameters .............................................................................................................. 166
13.4.1.2. Errors...................................................................................................................... 168
13.4.2. A3 Amendment for synchronous motors (SYNC) ................................................................... 168
13.4.2.1. Parameters .............................................................................................................. 168
13.4.2.2. Errors...................................................................................................................... 170
14. SOFTWARE UPDATING.................................................................................................................. 171
14.1. Requirements and needed elements ........................................................................................... 171
14.2. Process execution .................................................................................................................... 171
15. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................... 180
15.1. General features ...................................................................................................................... 180
15.2. Models, resistors, capacitors and filters ....................................................................................... 182
15.2.1. Asynchronous inverters ..................................................................................................... 182
15.2.2. Synchronous inverters ...................................................................................................... 182
15.3. Model and power of the inverter according to gearless configurations ............................................. 183
APPENDIX A: PINOUT DEVICE NI USB-8473 A XC9 OF THE INVERTER ............................................... 184
APPENDIX B: PINOUT OF THE ABSOLUTE/SINUSOIDAL ENCODER ADAPTER CABLE........................... 185
APPENDIX C: EXTRACT OF EN81-1+A3 AMENDMENT .......................................................................... 186

V0.01 – 04/2013 5 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

1. GENERAL
1.1. Scope of the manual

This manual scope is the 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter, with software versions 911A or higher for asynchronous motors
and versions 613 or higher for synchronous motors.

1.2. Use guideline of this manual

This manual must be used to work in a safe way with the 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter. It contains the safety
instructions to be complied with and the required information in order to get the proper functioning of the inverter.

This manual has to be kept together with the equipment to ensure all the staff involved in working with it can get
the documentation at any moment.

This manual also contains the instructions, guidelines and safety rules for the proper handling of the equipment.

This manual must be saved for its daily use and it has to be forwarded to all the final owners and customers.

1.3. Recipients
The recipients of this documentation are those persons in charge of the planning, adjustment and maintenance
who have been duly trained and instructed to work with this kind of equipment.

1.4. Document structure

This document structure obeys information accessibility criteria. It must be a support for the installation,
adjustment and solution of problems, without sacrificing the rigour of the provided information.

This is the reason why a complete chapter has been devoted to the commissioning guide, another chapter to the
parameters, another one to the errors and a series of appendixes to complete all the provided information has
been included as well.

1.5. Liability exclusions

The coherence of the supplied instructions in this manual, as well as the described hardware and software have
been checked. Despite that, we cannot ensure there is no error or discrepancy.

The contents of this manual will be submitted to periodic checks. The required modifications will be incorporated in
next version.

MP Lifts takes no responsibility for the caused damages due to a misuse or a mistaken, improper, incorrect or
inappropriate use of the inverter, neither for the consequences resulting from non-authorised modifications or
repairs.

1.6. Copyright
This manual contains information covered by copyright. No part of this manual may be photocopied, reproduced,
translated or published in whole or in part without the express prior consent of MP Lifts.

MP Lifts shall not be liable for any modification that has not been submitted to its express approval, neither for the
damages this may cause.

All rights reserved.

1.7. Symbols

Asynchronous Motors
The contents that appear near to this symbol are specifically referred to
asynchronous motors.

Synchronous Motors
The contents that appear near to this symbol are specifically referred to
synchronous motors.

V0.01 – 04/2013 6 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

2. SAFETY INFORMATION
2.1. General
This chapter contains instructions to prevent personal injury and material damage.
These instructions may be incomplete. In the event of doubt or problem, please contact MP Staff.

2.2. Inverter use

3VFMAC-DSP 6P is a frequency inverter devoted to the control of 3-phase motors. Any other use of the inverter
shall be considered inappropriate.

The reading of the instructions included in the present manual and their compliance, particularly those ones
referred to the safety, are considered a part of the appropriate use. Besides, the achievement of periodic
inspections is also a part of the appropriate use.

The inverter technician and not the manufacturer will be responsible for the personal and/or material damages
resulting from an inappropriate use.

2.3. Product safety

The product shall meet the quality and performance standards in effect at the time of delivery. The delivered
product is mainly secure and reliable. The inverter and its additional or complementary elements must be used in
fault-free conditions and they must be installed and used according to the use instructions.

A use that exceeds the limits set out in Chapter 15 can lead to deterioration of the inverter.

2.4. Requirements for staff

The persons in charge of planning, installation, adjustment and maintenance of the inverters must have the
required qualification, aptitudes and training to carry out the job.

Based on their knowledge and experience, they must recognize the potential risks of such a job. They must be
aware of the safety regulations and guidelines for the prevention of accidents at the European, national and
regional levels.

Only staff trained for this purpose is allowed to operate and the apprentices will only do it under supervision.

2.5. Commissioning
WARNING
During the equipment commissioning, unexpected situations of risk may happen, due to a defective installation,
faulty components, a bad adjustment or wrong electrical connections.

During the adjustment, we must ensure the following points:

• No persons or objects are in the danger area.

• The EMERGENCY STOP devices shall work properly.
• The overspeed governor (and all the other mechanical brakes) shall be activated.
• Compliance with applicable regulations and standards during the adjustment and commissioning.

2.6. Working on the inverter. Dangers due to residual voltage

Before starting to work on inverters which have already been installed or in installation process, ensure that they
are disconnected and cut off from the mains voltage. Also, take all the required measures to make impossible any
inadvertent reconnection.

There is a mortal danger of electrocution, even after the inverter has been disconnected, as its capacitors include
electrical components containing energy that might have been charged due to a malfunction.

When you want to manipulate the inverter, you must disconnect the power supply (R, S, T)
and WAIT UNTIL THE LED DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE IS COMPLETELY OFF. Otherwise, there
is a risk of electrical shock that can cause death.

2.7. Modifications/actions on the inverter

For safety reasons, it is forbidden to perform on own behalf interventions and modifications on the equipment.

All the modifications must be expressly approved by the manufacturer. Only materials/accessories
supplied/recommended by MP must be used. These materials/accessories have been officially approved for use on
the inverter. Otherwise, we cannot guarantee that they meet the relevant charge and safety standards. The spare
parts and the special equipment that are not supplied/recommended by MP are not allowed for use on the device.

V0.01 – 04/2013 7 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

2.8. Duties for the installer/maintenance staff

The equipment has been designed to comply with the standard specifications associated to the model and also
with the required level of protection.

However, to reach an effective safety, all the safety standards associated to all the installation elements have to
be complied with.

The implementation and planning of these measures are part of the competences of the installing/maintenance
company. This one must ensure that the staffs working on the inverter take all these measures and get them
complied with.

Particularly, the installing/maintenance company must ensure that:

• The inverter is used within its specifications.

• The proper functioning of the installation, paying a special attention to all the safety devices and to their
periodical inspections.
• The required protection equipment for the installation and maintenance staffs is available and operative.
• The manual is beside the inverter and in good order.
• The staffs operating on the inverter is duly qualified.
• The staffs operating on the equipment use the safety equipment.
• All the safety and warning notes stuck to the equipment remain there and are never removed.
• The staffs operating on the inverter are regularly trained on the relevant safety issues of the job and
have access to the relevant information about use instructions, particularly to those ones referred to
safety.
• All the safety and warning information is not removed and remains readable.

V0.01 – 04/2013 8 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

3. GENERAL OVERVIEW OF THE 3VFMAC-DSP 6P

3.1. Application field
The range of 3VFMAC-DSP frequency inverters is specifically designed for lift installations. It includes functions and
configuration parameters that bring unique features to the frequency inverter applied to lifts with asynchronous
and synchronous drive machines.

3.2. Functional description

3.2.1. General features

With two access levels to parameters, the MP’s inverter handling is quick and easy. The parameter banks include
functions like: S-curves, stop ramps, speed and current control, electronic motor protection, timers, external
brake control, output frequency up to 65 Hz, regulation of the output voltage and monitoring the output phases. It
allows real-time viewing of the most important electrical magnitudes.

3VFMAC-DSP 6P can operate in conventional open-loop control (voltage-frequency) and in closed-loop control. In
the latter case, the inverter is able to supply up to 200% of rated torque at rotation speed 0 in a motor with the
same power of the frequency inverter.

FEATURES

Control of asynchronous and synchronous motors.

Operating on battery power for emergency rescue. It detects the favourable direction of the load and
carries out the lift motion at low speed using 5 batteries of 12 volts which are connected on the bus of
continuous voltage.

Emergency rescue without batteries for synchronous motors and with 4 batteries for asynchronous
motors. Due to compatibility reasons, it also incorporates the rescue with 5 batteries, both for
asynchronous and synchronous motors.

It complies with standard EN-81 + A3 amendment, related to uncontrolled movements of the lift when
the car is at landing level, with open doors, both with synchronous (from version 613) and asynchronous
(from version 911A) motors.

Static autotuning. Machine modeling by direct parameterisation of the electric constants of the motor
(closed-loop control, synchronous motor).

Self-adjustment of the sinusoidal encoder signals.

Table of motors' characteristic values such as no load current, number of poles and machine constants.

Current limiter of output to motor (synchronous motor).

Configurability of the motion direction.

Available communication interfaces RS-485, ENDAT, SSI, Serial TTL and CAN-BUS allowing the
monitoring and remote control.

“User-friendly” modular programming interface via computer or “on-board” keyboard.

COMFORT IMPROVEMENTS

Removal of the roll-back effect at starting. With asynchronous motors, it is achieved by using the VK2P
weighing system; with synchronous motors, it incorporates the function of position control at starting and
stopping.

No electrical noise from the motor due to switching frequencies of up to 20 KHz in asynchronous motors
and up to 14 KHz in synchronous, which allows its installation in machine room less lifts.

Extra travel quality due to the automatic minimum jerk adjustment when starting and stopping, which
removes the disgusting sensation caused by the acceleration at the starting and stopping moments.

Characterisation of short ramps with two parameters: increase of target speed and hold speed timer. The
converter uses these two data to automatically adjust the curve, with the same aim of comfort and the
travel time at slow speed is reduced.

Second order current filter removing the resonance frequencies generated by synchronous motors.

Second order current advanced filter, with parameterisable cut off frequency, removing the resonance
frequencies generated by synchronous motors.

Direct access through absolute positioning, which allows the approach section to be removed, eliminating
unnecessary waiting time for users 1.

Progressive starting. For lifts with a backpack frame, there is an initial jerk due to the frame interlock on
the guide rails. This feature makes possible to define a time interval during which a constant acceleration
is applied, thereby removing the initial jolt felt in the car.

It adds specific features for lifts, particularly affecting the comfort (5 S-curves) and the levelling.

1
Coming soon

V0.01 – 04/2013 9 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

3.2.2. Control system

The inverter and the control board communicate each other via inputs and outputs. The reception of external
commands is achieved via voltage-free contacts.

The inverter includes three outputs for the control of:

- Triac of contactors.
- Brake relay.
- Speed limit relay.

There are two banks of speed and acceleration which will be activated by activating inputs provided for that
purpose.

3.2.3. Operating modes

The 3VFMAC-DSP 6P has two operating modes: RUN Mode and PROGRAMMING or SETUP Mode, as shown on the
following diagram:

NO energy output
STOP: Idle state waiting for a run command
through XC10/XC2 inputs.
Machine idle
Working mode
Two possible states
Energy output
RUN: The inverter is making the elevator
Operating move
modes Machine working

Setup Mode
FIGURE 3.1

As shown, in RUN mode, two possible states are set out: Stop, where the inverter does not give energy and the
machine remains idle and ready for running and Run, the inverter gives energy and the machine is working. In
RUN mode, both stop and run states, no parameter can be modified. In this state, magnitudes such as speed,
voltage, current, etc. can be real-time monitored.

In PROGRAMMING or SETUP mode, the values of the parameters can be edited and adjusted.

As we shall see later on, we can know at any moment whether the inverter is in RUN (Stopped or Running) or in
PROGRAMMING mode because it is provided with both a console and a led to inform about its present state.

3.2.4. Parameterisation and monitoring

The parameters are gathered in significant sheets or groups: Bank 1 of speed (TR1), Bank 2 of speed (TR2),
Encoder (ENC), etc. The feature associated to the group or sheet is characterised into each sheet.

3VFMAC-DSP 6P offers a comfortable, easy and very operative technique of parameterisation (equipment
configuration).

In addition, the real-time viewing of the most outstanding electrical magnitudes is available: current consumption
by motor, speed, target speed, voltage of capacitors, etc.

V0.01 – 04/2013 10 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

3.3. Outstanding parts of the equipment

3.3.1. LEDs

3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter includes a total of 16 LEDs, divided into three banks of SMD LEDs and 2 additional
discrete LEDs, located on the inverter board, as shown on the picture:

PICTURE 3.1

The purpose of these LEDs is to inform about the inverter state, thereby they are a precious help to solve and
debug problems, or to adjust the inverter.

3.3.1.1. LED Bank 1: Inputs for control board commands and contactor reading

º
PICTURE 3.2

V0.01 – 04/2013 11 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

The following table shows the meaning of each LED, depending on its state (on/off), as well as the identification of
the associated connector and terminal:

LED DESCRIPTION STATE MEANING CONNECTOR/TERMINAL

ON Running command Voltage-free input.
13 Running command Connector XC2/XC10(2): Terminals
OFF Stopping command
11 (common), 13
ON High speed Voltage-free input.
14 Speed command Connector XC2/XC10(2): Terminals
OFF Slow speed
11 (common), 14
Rated speed/Approach: Voltage-free input.
ON
TR2.00 and TR2.01, respectively. Connector XC2/XC10(2): Terminals
15 2nd Speed Bank
Rated speed/ Approach: 11 (common), 15
OFF
TR1.00 and TR1.01, respectively.
ON Normal Mode Voltage-free input.
Connector XC2/XC10(2): Terminals
11 (common), 16.
16 Inspection
OFF Inspection Mode
IMPORTANT: negative logic signal:
ON = NO INSPECTION.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time: Voltage-free input.
TR2.02, TR2.04. Connector XC2/XC10(2): Terminals
ON
Curve modification factor: 11 (common), 17
TR2.03, TR2.05.
17 2nd Acceleration Bank
Acceleration/Deceleration Time:
TR2.02, TR2.04.
OFF
Curve modification factor:
TR2.03, TR2.05.
ON Upward command Voltage-free input.
18 Direction command Connector XC2/XC10(2): Terminals
OFF Downward command
11 (common), 18
Error Reset ON Signal of error RESET activated
OFF Signal of error RESET deactivated
If N/CLOSED (4), brake closed.
ON
If N/OPEN (4), brake open.
Reading of brake If N/CLOSED (4), brake open.
microswitches OFF
If N/OPEN (4), brake closed.
(synchronous)
Voltage-free input.
19 Connector XC2(3):Terminals 11
ON Overspeed governor interlocking
(common), 19

Reading of coil state

Interlocking of
governor (EN-81+
A3 amendment OFF Overspeed governor released
Asynchronous)

TABLE 3.1

Should you need further information about inverter control signals, refer to chapter 9.

2
The inputs of the control board commands can be received by the inverter via connector XC2, if it is a MicroBasic or a non-MP Controller, and via
connector XC10, if it is a Via Serie Controller.
3
The input signal of ERROR RESET/READING OF BRAKE MICROSWITCHES/COIL STATE is only enabled at the terminal 19 of connector XC2, NEVER via
connector XC10 (Via Serie commands).
4
The logic will be given to the inverter by the parameter STC.08.

V0.01 – 04/2013 12 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

3.3.1.2. LED Bank 2: Input for the rescue signal and voltage-free outputs

SILK-SCREEN
BANK DESCRIPTION CONNECTOR/TERMINAL
PRINTING
Connector XC6.
Rescue signal.
Voltage-free input.
For DSP-5 battery-rescue, terminals
It is used to activate the automatic
EM 20 and 23.
rescue, with and without batteries, for
both synchronous and asynchronous
For DSP-4 battery-rescue or DSP-
motor.
UPS-rescue, terminals 21 and 23.
There are 3 uses for this output: Connector XC4, terminals 32-33.

1) Speed limit relay.

2) Activator of the coil for

overspeed governor
interlocking
(asynchronous + A3 amendment).
SP
3) Inverter activity
monitor. This output goes
Bank 2
to a control board input in
order to report if the inverter is
activated and ready for travelling
(synchronous + A3 amendment).

Voltage-free output.
Contactor output (triac) Connector XC4, terminals 34-35.
K
Voltage-free output.
Brake activation relay. Connector XC4, terminals 36-37.
BK
Voltage-free output.

TABLE 3.2

3.3.1.3. LED Bank 3: Indicators

SILK-SCREEN
BANK DESCRIPTION
PRINTING
Reports on the state of the
communication with the weighing system
VK2P (asynchronous motors only).
If the communication is good enough,
RS-485 the led will be blinking. Otherwise, it will
be off.

Reports on the state of the

communication with the absolute
encoder (synchronous motors only).
ENCODER If the communication is good enough,
Bank 3 the led will be blinking.

TABLE 3.3

V0.01 – 04/2013 13 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

3.3.1.4. LED Run

Green LED located at the right part of the console, together with the keyboard.

PICTURE 3.3
This LED function is to report on the inverter operation state:

STATE DESCRIPTION
OFF The inverter is in PROGRAM or SETUP mode.
The inverter is in standby state to start a service
FIXED, ON
(RUN mode, Stopped).
The inverter is making a service (RUN mode,
BLINKING, ON
Running).

TABLE 3.4

This LED informs in an indirect way that the equipment is powered. If it does not switch on when applying power,
the connections R, S and T must be checked as well as the fuses F3 and F4 (maximum permitted value 1 Amp).

3.3.1.5. LED “DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE”

Red LED. It informs about a high level of current during the power stage of the equipment.

PICTURE 3.4

During the time the equipment is being powered, i.e. the LED RUN is on, if the LED DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE is off,
the whole equipment shall be replaced.

Whenever you want to handle the inverter, you must disconnect the power supply (R, S, T)
and WAIT UNTIL THE LED “DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE” IS COMPLETELY OFF. Otherwise, there
is a risk of electric shock that may cause death.

V0.01 – 04/2013 14 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

3.3.2. Fuses

The mission of the fuses is to protect the inverter against voltage surges, ground faults and/or short circuits.

3VFMAC-DSP 6P is provided with four fuses, located on the board as shown in below picture.

PICTURE 3.5

3.3.2.1. Fuse F1

It protects the equipment power stage. If the inverter is powered via R, S, T, i.e., if the LED RUN is on, and the
LED DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE is off, we may conclude that the fuse is burnt. In this case, the complete equipment
must be replaced.

NEVER REPLACE THE FUSE BY ANOTHER ONE, NOR MAKE SHUNTS BETWEEN ITS TERMINALS:
YOU MAY CAUSE THE EQUIPMENT EXPLOSION.

V0.01 – 04/2013 15 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

3.3.2.2. Fuse F2 (1A)

It protects the power supply of 10 Vdc that powers:

. Fans (terminals (+), (-)).

. Encoder of magnets (terminals 20 - 21 - 22).
. Control inputs (terminals from 11 to 19).

If the fuse burns, check the proper connection of the mentioned elements.

The value of this fuse is 2A. This is the MAXIMUM VALUE. Do not change it for higher values;
you may cause THE EQUIPMENT COMPLETE DESTRUCTION.

3.3.2.3. Fuses F3 (1A), F4 (1A)

It protects the inputs/outputs area of the inverter. If it repeatedly burns, the complete equipment must be
replaced.

The value of these fuses is 1A. This is the MAXIMUM VALUE. Do not change it for higher values;
you may cause THE EQUIPMENT COMPLETE DESTRUCTION.

3.3.3. Relays + Triac

PICTURE 3.6

V0.01 – 04/2013 16 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

The inverter is provided with three voltage-free output signals which are controlled by the 2 relays and one triac
located as shown in the previous picture. These are:

- KRL1

This relay can be used for 3 different functions, depending on the motor type and whether the installation
includes or not the EN81 + A3 amendment: overspeed governor interlocking, inverter state monitoring and
speed limit relay, as shown in following diagram:

(1) Overspeed governor Interlocking/Release. This function is available for asynchronous inverters including
A3 amendment activation. The output logic of this signal is the following one:

Open relay (led SP off): Overspeed governor interlocking

Closed relay (led SP off): Overspeed governor release

(2) Inverter state monitoring. This function is available for synchronous inverters with A3 amendment
feature activated. Through this signal, the inverter informs the control board about its state:

Open relay (led SP off): Inverter offline

Closed relay (led SP off): Inverter online/ready

(3) Limit speed relay. It switches when the value set in parameter TR0.01 is exceeded. In open-loop
control, it switches when the output electric frequency exceeds it. In closed-loop control, it switches when
the actual rotation speed of the motor exceeds it. The activation logic can be determined in the parameter
TR0.02.

- KRL2: TRIAC FOR CONTROL OF CONTACTORS

It controls, in series with the controller safety chain, the activation and deactivation of contactors, in
coordination with the brake control (KRL3).

- KRL3: RELAY FOR BRAKE CONTROL

It controls, in series with the contactors, the opening and closing of the drive machine brake, in coordination
with the control of contactors (KRL2).

V0.01 – 04/2013 17 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

3.3.4. Monitoring and Programming Interface

Built with five displays of 7 segments + decimal full stop D1, D2, D3, D4 y D5 and four keys P/R, ,  y . This
set, also called console “on-board”, enables all the tasks of electric magnitude monitoring to be made during the
operation and configuration of the equipment features.

PICTURE 3.7

V0.01 – 04/2013 18 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

3.4. Mains power connections

PICTURE 3.8

ITEM REF.
CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION
ON PICTURE 3.8
R, S, T 1 Three-phase Input 400 Vac
2
If automatic rescue (5-batteries, 4-batteries or without batteries): Three-phase 400
Vac Input. Fuses F3 and F4 not there.

XC12
If NO automatic rescue: Connector not used. Fuses F3 and F4 there.

V0.01 – 04/2013 19 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

ITEM REF.
CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION
ON PICTURE 3.8
U, V, W 3 Output phases to motor
External connection of capacitors. Only connect the set of electrolytic capacitors
-CE,+CE 4, 7
which is supplied together with the equipment.
External power bridge through contactors K1/K2. Il will be compulsory implemented
C1, C2 5, 6
by putting in series a power contact of each contactor.
If automatic rescue with 5 batteries: -CE and C3 isolated.

C3: Connection of the batteries positive terminal of the rescue device.

–CE: negative batteries terminal.
+CE/C2, C3 7,8
IMPORTANT NOTE: Both points must be FULL isolated.

In any other case (4 batteries-DSP Rescue, UPS-DSP Rescue): C3 joined to +CE/C2

by the plate provided for this purpose.

V0.01 – 04/2013 20 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

ITEM REF.
CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION
ON PICTURE 3.8
As already stated in this table, C1 is used for the external power bridge through
contactors K1/K2 and -CE as the connection point of the negative terminal of the
electrolytic capacitors.

Furthermore, these two connection points can be used for other connections,
depending on whether or not the inverter includes automatic rescue; and, if yes,
depending on the rescue type.

Automatic
Machine Description Configuration
Rescue
C1 (faston): Contactors
WITHOUT bridge. Cable cross-
RESCUE section according to
power.

5 -CE: Capacitors
BATTERIES- negative terminal
RESCUE (faston/ring). Cable
cross-section according
to power.
C1 (faston): Contactors
bridge. Cable cross-
section according to
power.

-CE: Capacitors
4 negative terminal
BATTERIES- (faston/ring). Cable
RESCUE cross-section according
to power.

C1, -CE 4,5 -CE: Rescue negative

terminal (ring). Cable
cross-section according
to power.
C1 (faston): Contactors
WITHOUT bridge. Cable cross-
RESCUE section according to
power.

5 -CE: Rescue negative

BATTERIES- terminal (ring). Cable
RESCUE cross-section according
to power.
C1: Double faston. It is
provided with two
connections: Contactors
bridge with diameter
according to power and
rescue positive terminal,
red and cable-cross
section 0.4.
RESCUE
WITHOUT -CE: Capacitors
BATTERIES negative terminal
(faston/ring). Cable
cross-section according
to power

-CE: Rescue negative

terminal (ring). Cable
cross-section 0.4.

B1, B2 9 External connection of brake resistor

TABLE 3.5

VERY IMPORTANT: The connections of areas 2, 4, 5, 7 and 8, as well as the presence or

not of the fuses F3 and F4 depend on the equipment configuration: WITHOUT rescue,
WITH 4-batteries automatic rescue + contactor KPW, WITH 5-batteries automatic rescue
+ contactors KG/KUPS or automatic rescue WITHOUT batteries.

V0.01 – 04/2013 21 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

3.5. Input command connections

PICTURE 3.9

CONNECTOR ITEM REF. ON PICTURE 3.9 DESCRIPTION

XC13 1 Reading of the contactors coil activation

Input of non-MP and MicroBasic command signals.

Signal reading of ERROR RESET/BRAKE MICROSWITCHES/
XC2 2
STATE OF COIL FOR OVERSPEED GOVERNOR
INTERLOCKING (Terminal 19).

XC10 3 Input signals for Via Serie control board commands.

XC8 4.a
Input for non-MP encoder and sinusoidal encoder.
XC6 4.b

Low cost encoder:

Terminals 20 (+10V), 21 (0V) ,22 (impulse
reading)

XC3 5 Input for rescue signal:

- If DSP Rescue-5 batteries : Terminals 20, 23

- If DSP Rescue-4 batteries, DSP Rescue-UPS: Terminals

21, 23

V0.01 – 04/2013 22 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

CONNECTOR ITEM REF. ON PICTURE 3.9 DESCRIPTION

Voltage-free outputs:

32, 33: RL1. Relay of speed limit/Interlocking activation

/Monitoring of inverter state.
XC4 6
34, 35: RL2. Triac to control contactors

36, 37: RL3. Relay to control machine brake.

With absolute encoder (synchronous only):

XC5: Data (differential, bidirectional)
XC7: Clock (differential)

XC5 7.a
XC7 7.b
With VK2P (weighing system) (optional,
asynchronous only)
XC5: Communication RS-485 (bidirectional)
XC7: Not used

TABLE 3.6
3.6. Communication Interfaces

PICTURE 3.10

V0.01 – 04/2013 23 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

CONNECTOR PICTURE DESCRIPTION

Communication CAN Control
50 : CAN_H
49 : CAN_L
XC9 1
48 : Ground/Negative
This interface is used for monitoring, for Management of
Errors and for reading/writing of parameters.
Interface series communication
It is used for the software updating and as communication
interface with MPConfig (reading/writing of parameters) and
PROGRAM 2
with Management of Errors.
The interface 3VFMAC-DSP/Universal-RS232 will be
connected in this connector.

TABLA 3.7

3.7. Models

The 3VFMAC-DSP 6P models available are:

• 3VFMAC-DSP 6P 10 / Up to 10 HP. There are two versions:

- Version 400: 400 Vac -15%, +10%

- Version 220: 220 Vac -15%, +10%

• 3VFMAC-DSP 6P 15 / Up to 15 HP

- Version 400: 400 Vac -15%, +10%

• 3VFMAC-DSP 6P 20 / Up to 20 HP

- Version 400: 400 Vac -15%, +10%

For further details, refer to “Chapter 15: Technical specifications”.

V0.01 – 04/2013 24 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

4. GENERAL DIMENSIONS

70

202
243
127
25

176 176

W
H

W L H
10-15 HP 190 257 135
20 HP 190 257 160
L

V0.01 – 04/2013 25 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

5. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
5.1. Asynchronous

(1) 10Cv / 15 Cv / 20Cv (400Vac)

K1
+
W
- +CE
K2
+ -CE
M V
~3 -

U
10Cv (220Vac)
MACHINE

+ + +CE
- - -CE

C1 C2 U V W

R
B2
THREE-PHASE
PCB
FILTER S
POWER SUPPLY 3VF BRAKING
RESISTOR
T DSP
B1

TWO-PHASE 400Vac
POWER SUPPLY XC12
0Vac
(Automatic rescue case) +CE

(1)
11
RUN
13 -CE
V1
14
V2 50
15
V3 XC2 CAN COMUNICATION
16 XC9 49
(Not available)
AC 48
17
REV / FWD
18
PROG 1 23
19
22 AUTOMATIC RESCUE
XC3 21
CONNECTIONS
0Vac 20
11
K2 K1 XC13
12

CONTROL OF 5
C2-
CONTACTORS C2+
32 4
PROG 2
33 XC6 3
2
C1-
C1+ ENC
SAFETY 34 XC4
CHAIN 35 1
(110 Vac) 24Vdc 36
37
(+)
(-)

BRAKE
KRFR
CONTROL
FORCED FAN
0Vdc SYSTEM

V0.01 – 04/2013 26 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

5.2. Synchronous

K1

W
K2 (1) 10Cv / 15 Cv / 20Cv (400Vac)
M V
+
~3
U - +CE
+ -CE
MACHINE
-

C1 C2 U V W

R
B2
PCB
THREE-PHASE FILTER S
POWER SUPPLY 3VF BRAKING
RESISTOR
T DSP
B1

TWO-PHASE 400Vac
POWER SUPPLY XC12
0Vac
(Automatic rescue case) +CE

(1)
11
RUN
13 -CE
V1
14
V2 50
15
V3 XC2 CAN COMUNICATION
16 XC9 49
AC 48
(Not available)
17
REV / FWD
18
PROG 1 23
19
22 AUTOMATIC RESCUE
XC3 21 CONNECTIONS
0Vac 20
11
K2 K1 XC13 42
/B
12
XC8 41
B

CONTROL OF CLK
T4
CONTACTORS XC7 T3
/CLK
32
PROG 2
33 7
6
/A
A
ENC
SAFETY 34 XC4 XC6
CHAIN 35 1
/DATA
(110 Vac) 24Vdc 36 T2
XC5 T1
DATA
37
(+)
(-)

BRAKE KRFR
CONTROL
FORCED FAN
0Vdc
SYSTEM

V0.01 – 04/2013 27 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

6. ADDITIONAL ELEMENTS
6.1. Encoder
We have to distinguish between asynchronous and synchronous machines:

- In asynchronous machines: the encoder use is optional, although it is highly recommended as it

significantly improves the lift performance in regard with energy efficiency, control and comfort. Two
encoder types can be installed:

• Industrial Encoder. TTL. 5 Volts.

• Magnet Encoder or low cost.

- In synchronous machines: the encoder use is mandatory, as this type of machines can only be controlled
in closed-loop mode. For this kind of machines, the used encoder includes both the Endat01 absolute
encoder technology and the incremental sinusoidal 1Vpp technology.

The encoder use allows the flux vector control by 3VFMAC-DSP 6P with feedback of the speed reading (closed-
loop). This brings the following advantages:

1. Significant improvement in levelling. During the approach speed, the flux vector control guarantees
that the motor always rotates at the same speed, independently of the existing load in the car.
Furthermore, parameter RSN.05 (which is only operative in flux vector control) allows adjusting the
levelling with absolute accuracy.

As a final result, independently of the existing load in the car, the levelling point is always the same.

2. Overtorque. The main virtue of the flux vector control is to allow reaching the maximum possible motor
torque over the entire frequency range. Thereby, in the event of overloads in car, the lift behaviour is
much more reliable.

3. Electricity consumption reduction. The reduction in energy involved by the use of frequency inverter
over other solutions (2-speeds, voltage inverter...) is well known. But, when operating with flux vector
control the consumption is further more reduced compared to the conventional open-loop solution,
because the equipment reduces very significantly the consumed current whenever the required torque is
almost naught (for instance: half-loaded car). This also provides greater durability to the equipment.

4. Operating global reliability. The closed-loop control tends to make the motor rotate very close to
theoretical curve of speed, due to the optimum dynamic response of the set.

These advantages apply to both synchronous and asynchronous machines.

V0.01 – 04/2013 28 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

6.1.1. Industrial encoder (asynchronous motors only)

3VFMAC-DSP 6P frequency inverter is provided with a connector (XC6) to allow using an industrial encoder. It is
recommended and mandatory to use it when the selected machine is VVVF type. It is located in motor and makes
the equipment can know in real time the rotation speed. It will have to be supplied together with the machine, and
its features will be:

. Power supply 5 Vdc

. Two outputs of pulse trains
. Recommendable 2000 pulses per turn (valid between 500 and 5000)
. Differential output, RS-442 or line driver. Power supply 5 Vdc.

The connector XC6 includes following connections:

1: Cable shield of the encoder (to ground).

2: Reading of pulses C1 (+).
3: Reading of pulses C1 (-).
4: Reading of pulses C2 (+).
5: Reading of pulses C2 (-).

The figure shows the connection between this encoder and 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter.

+24 0Vdc
ENCODER PCB
POWER SUPPLY
+5 0Vdc
External
Shield 1 1
Vertically 2
2
3 connected 3
4 4
5 5
XC6 XC6

Encoder XENC
Vdc +
0 -
A+ C1+
A- C1-
+ - C1+ C1- C2+C2-
B+ C2+
B- C2-
XENC 0+ Not connected
0- Not connected
FIGURE 6.1

To ensure the proper motion of the car and to make it properly coincide with the encoder reading, you must
perform the following actions in the specified order:

1. Set the equipment to make it operate in open-loop mode (CNF.00=0). Make the car move and confirm it
goes upwards when the ascent order is given (and vice versa). If the car motion is in the opposite
direction to the commanded one, exchange 2 phases in the power connectors of output to the motor
inside the controller (terminals U, V, W). Confirm that now the motion coincides with the given order.

2. After that, connect the encoder. Be especially careful, because the encoder can be deteriorated if the
connections are not properly done.

Confirm that the number of motor poles (DRI.03) and the number of encoder pulses (ENC.00) have been
set to the proper values.

3. The following checks must be done in stop, in upwards and downwards. The encoder will be OK if and
only if the three conditions related here below are complied with:

V0.01 – 04/2013 29 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

• Stopped. The "Encod" value will be displayed. We will touch the encoder connector; we will
smoothly pull the cables. The value should remain at 0. If not, the encoder connection shall be
checked.
• Upwards. The "UEL" viewing must be a positive value and very close to "FrEC", the "E5" viewing
must also be positive and close to "FrEC" and the value of "Encod" counter shall be decreasing.
• Downwards. The "UEL" viewing must be a negative value and its absolute value very close to
"FrEC", the "E5" viewing must also be negative and its absolute value close to "FrEC" and the value
of "Encod" counter shall be increasing.

If all the specified conditions are not met in any of the described situations, there is a problem with the
encoder. The most common problems related to the encoder are:

a) While the lift is moving, upwards or downwards, if the “Encod” viewing value remains at zero, it
means there is a connection error in the encoder (power supply, a non-connected channel).
Check once more the connections.

b) In the "UEL" viewing, if a rotation speed with opposite sign to the electric frequency of “E5”
output appears, it means that the two channels of the pulse train are connected in reverse
order. To correct the order, the channels must be exchanged one another; i.e., exchange the
cable C1 + for the C2 + and the C1 – for the C2 -.

c) If “UEL” and “E5” values have the same sign, but they differ significantly, check parameters
DRI.03 (number of poles) and ENC.00 (number of encoder pulses).

After the above mentioned points have been checked, repeat all the operations included in this section
from the beginning.

4. Introduce the value of motor no-load current in parameter INT.00. It is more or less equal to the current
consumed by the motor when operating in open-loop mode (CNF.00=0), at rated speed, when the car is
empty and moving upwards. Read this current on the equipment display, introduce it on INT.00. Set the
inverter in closed-loop mode (CNF.00=1).

First, in inspection mode or rescue mode and, after, in normal mode, make the car travel several times.
As a precautionary measure, lower the high speed (TR1.00), just in case there is any kind of problem.

At this moment, if there are vibrations or if error 05 or error 11 appears, check the proper connection to
ground of the encoder shield, at the connection of the encoder to the controller, as shown in below
picture:

PICTURE 6.1

Regarding to inverter configuration, to ensure the inverter proper functioning, we must:

1. Check that the machine number of poles is correct (parameter DRI.03).

2. Set the value of parameter ENC.00 (encoder number of pulses) according to the number of pulses per
turn indicated by the encoder manufacturer.

V0.01 – 04/2013 30 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

6.1.2. Low cost encoder (asynchronous motors only)

3VFMAC-DSP 6P frequency inverter is provided with a connector (XC3) to allow using a low cost encoder. It is
recommended to use this encoder type whenever the coupling of an industrial encoder to the machine is not
possible and whenever the functioning in open-loop mode is not able to meet all the wanted expectations.

Its use shall be limited to situations when the adaptation of a digital encoder to the machine is absolutely
impossible. Due to its low resolution, the obtained comfort rate will always be well below the comfort degree
provided by an industrial encoder.

The connector C3 includes the following connections:

20: positive terminal of encoder power supply (+10 Vdc).

21: negative terminal of encoder power supply (0 Vdc).
22: Reading of pulses, channel 1.

The encoder maximum consumption will be 40 mA. The encoder must be provided with open-collector outputs.
The low cost encoder consists of magnets (8, 10 or 12) located on the machine handwheel (or equivalent part),
equidistantly placed and with alternating polarities. A sensor (supplied with the equipment) will be placed in such a
way its active front face (marked with a white point) is fully facing the magnets. The maximum distance between
the white point and the magnets will be 2 mm.

FIGURE 6.2

Together with the sensor and magnets, a string and some metal profiles are supplied. The string enables placing
the magnets in a quick and easy way. Place (usually) 12 magnets:

1. Embrace the handwheel with the string and make a knot so that the string keeps the handwheel
perimeter size.

2. Take out the string, stretch it and mark the end. Now the handwheel is divided into 2 parts. Fold the
marked end upon the knot; mark the 2 new ends of string and now the handwheel is divided into 4 parts.

3. Place back the string embracing the handwheel. Marks on the string indicate the first 4 division points of
the handwheel.

4. By using the string, subdivide each quarter of the handwheel until all the points are achieved.

5. Fix the magnets with high-tack glue (Loctite or similar). Ensure their perfect fixing.

V0.01 – 04/2013 31 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

FIGURE 6.3

VERY IMPORTANT: the positioning of the magnets is very important. They must be
perfectly equidistant.

VERY IMPORTANT: The polarity of the magnets must be alternate. In order to confirm the
correct positioning, connect the equipment to the encoder (paying attention to the
numbering) and turn on the power on the frequency converter only (not on the control
board). By hand, make the motor move. Each time a magnet faces the sensor, the LED
must change its state.

Regarding to the converter configuration, in order to get a proper operation, we must:

1. Check that the machine number of poles is correct (parameter DRI.03).

2. Set the value of parameter ENC.00 (encoder number of pulses) like the number of placed magnets
divided by two, as each couple of magnets generates one pulse. Therefore, if the numbers of permitted
magnets are 8, 10 and 12, the values of ENC.00 associated to each of them are 4, 5 and 6, respectively.

6.1.3. Absolute/sinusoidal encoder (synchronous motors only)

3VFMAC-DSP 6P frequency converter is provided with four connectors (XC6, XC8, XC7 and XC5) to allow using an
absolute/sinusoidal encoder. It is IMPERATIVE and MANDATORY to use it for the control of synchronous machines.
It will be placed in the motor and it will enable the equipment to know in real time the rotation speed and the rotor
exact position, which are necessary conditions for the control of this type of machines.

Even though it is a single physical device, actually, this encoder type consists of two different encoders: the
absolute encoder and the sinusoidal encoder.

It must be supplied together with the machine, and its features are:

- Power supply: 5 Vdc.

- Sinusoidal encoder: two differential sinusoidal channels, 1Vpp geometrically displaced in 90º. 2048 cycles
per turn recommended, and the valid values are 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096.

- Absolute encoder: Protocol Endat01® (proprietary protocol Heidenhain). It consists of two differential
channels of data and clock, with 8192 positions for a complete turn.

V0.01 – 04/2013 32 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

In the following table, you will get the description of connectors XC6, XC8, XC5 and XC7 related to the
sinusoidal/absolute encoder connection:

ENCODER CONNECTOR TERMINAL DESCRIPTION

Now, NOT USED
1
In the past, SHIELD
2 NOT USED
3 NOT USED
XC6
4 NOT USED
5 NOT USED
6 Channel A+
Sinusoidal 7 Channel A-
41 Channel B+
42 Channel B-
43 NOT USED
XC8 44 NOT USED
45 NOT USED
46 NOT USED
47 NOT USED
T1 DATA-
XC5
T2 DATA+
Absolute
T3 CLOCK-
XC7
T4 CLOCK+
TABLE 6.1

The sinusoidal/absolute encoder connection to 3VFMAC-DSP 6P is made through an adaptor cable supplied by MP.

PICTURE 6.2

As shown in the picture, the cable is provided with a female connector DB15 at one end which will be connected to
the male connector DB15 of the machine encoder. The other end is provided with 2 Wago seven-pole connectors
(XC6 and XC8), 2 two-pole Wago connectors (XC5 and XC7) and 1 three-pole Wago connector (power supply, with
two terminals +,- only).

This adaptor cable will be integrated in controllers supplied by MP.

In the first controllers for controlling synchronous machines, the encoder shield was connected to terminal 1 of the
connector XC6. Now, the shield connection to this terminal has been removed. Approximately 1 cm of the adaptor
shield is bare to be fixed with screw/washer to bottom plate of the cabinet.

To ensure the proper motion of the car, we must check the absolute encoder and sinusoidal encoder; it is
mandatory to make following operations in the specified order:

1. Confirm the values of following parameters:

ENC.00: We must set ENC.00 to the number of pulses per turn of the encoder coupled to the motor.

It is very important to be sure about this value. A mistaken value at this parameter may cause an
overspeed and/or an erratic behaviour.

ENC.01: 21

V0.01 – 04/2013 33 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

TR1.00: On the machine’s nameplate, the electric nominal frequency (Fn) is indicated. This is the
maximum value to be set to this parameter.
TR1.01: It has to be set about 10% of TR1.00, and with margins from 5% up to 15%.
TR0.00: The inspection speed value has to be set at 30% of the rated speed (TR1.00).
DRI.03: Check that the value of number of pole of this parameter corresponds to the value shown on
the machine’s nameplate. If it not shown, it could be obtained from the following formula:

120xFrequency

RPM

VEL.10: 11000

DRI.07: Refer to the machine’s nameplate to set the value shown there (In).

INT.03, INT.05, INT.04, INT.06: Depending on the machine brand/model. If they are not available,
contact with MP.

2. With the inverter in RUN mode, at idle state, if the inverter display shows Err05, it means there is a
problem with the sinusoidal encoder. We will have to make following checks:

- Check if the main board is switched on.

- Press the red button (P/R) on the inverter.

- If the error persists, we must make following checks:

a) Check the encoder power supply (5 Vdc).

b) Check that the negative terminal of the power source is connected to ground.

c) Check the proper connection of terminals XC6 and XC8.

d) Check that the adaptor cable wires coming out from connectors XC6 and XC8 are not
“bitten” in plastic.

e) Check that the length of the cable between the machine encoder up to the adaptor
cable is about 10 m.

f) Check the continuity of all and each pin of the adaptor cable connector DB15 in regard
with the terminals of Wago connectors, as shown in following table:

DB15 FEMALE

INVERTER

1 XC5/T2
2 XC5/T1
3 NC
4 POSITIVE (5V)
5 NEGATIVE (GND)
6 NC
7 XC8/41
8 NC
9 XC7/T3
10 XC7/T4
11 NC
12 XC6/6
13 XC6/7
14 XC8/42
15 NC
In the past, XC6/1
HOUSING Now, ground
(cabinet rear plate)

TABLE 6.2

V0.01 – 04/2013 34 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

After making all these checks, press the inverter red button (PR).

If error 05 still persists, contact MP Lifts staff.

3. Set the control board in inspection mode or in MES mode.

4. Move the lift upwards or downwards. If err51 appears when starting, we must make following checks:
a) Check the proper connection of connectors XC5 and XC7 to the inverter.
b) Check that the Wago connectors do not bite the plastic.
c) Check the proper connection of the adaptor cable to the terminal DB15 of the encoder cable.
d) Check one by one the electrical continuity of the adapter cable wires, according to previous
table (TABLE 6.1.2).
e) Check that the encoder supports the Endat protocol, as shown in here below picture.

PICTURE 6.3

If error 05 still persists, contact MP Lifts staff.

5. At this point, we must check the motion direction. Let us remind that the control board is in Inspection
mode or in MES mode. After checking that point, press the upwards (or downwards) button.

If the lift moves downwards (or upwards), i.e., it travels in the opposite direction of the commanded
one, we must modify parameter CNF.05:

If CNF.05 = 1, set CNF.05 = 0

If CNF.05 = 0, set CNF.05 = 1

Try again to press the upwards (or downwards) button and verify the proper motion direction.

VERY IMPORTANT: WITH SYNCRHONOUS MACHINES, TO MODIFY THE MOTION

DIRECTION, NEVER, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, CHANGE THE ORDER OF THE
OUPUT PHASES TO THE MOTOR, as done with asynchronous machines.

V0.01 – 04/2013 35 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

6.2. Weighing control: VK2P (asynchronous only)

6.2.1. Description

This feature is available for asynchronous motors only. This performance is an optional feature.

This system enables 3VFMAC-DSP 6P, by incorporating a weighing reader (VK2P), to adjust the required motor
torque to carry out a service independently from the load in car.

The main aim of using the VK2P is to avoid the roll-back effect when starting and it is particularly suitable for low-
inertia machines.

The user shall indicate the car maximum load Q (parameter PSO.00), as well as the maximum torque that the
system will apply in order to correct the load in car (parameter PSO.01).

This feature will be operative only if the equipment is configured in close-loop mode with industrial encoder.

6.2.2. Requirements

1. Weighing reader VK2P with bedframe/car (model TCE) load cells and a proper calibration.

2. Communication between both systems. The communication between 3VFMAC-DSP 6P and VK2P is of RS-
485 type and it is carried out between terminals T1 and T2 of connector XC5 and terminals T1 and T2 of
VK2P, respectively.

3. Operation mode 3VFMAC-DSP 6P CLOSED-LOOP with industrial encoder (CNF.00 = 1, ENC.00 ≥ 500 and
ENC.00 ≤ 5000).

6.2.3. Parameterisation

For the activation/deactivation of this feature, there is no parameter. As a matter of fact, whenever 3VFMAC-DSP
6P is connected to a VK2P, this feature is activated.

But in the group PSO, there are parameters dedicated to the weighing control configuration:

PSO.00: Maximum load in car in kilograms. Range from 200 up to 3000. Default value depending on model:
10 HP: 450 Kg; 15 HP: 630 Kg; 20 HP: 900 Kg.

PSO.01: Torque percentage in regard with the rated torque to be applied for the maximum load. Range
from 0 up to 50. Default value: 0.

As mentioned in previous section “Requirements”, this feature will be operative if 3VFMAC-DSP 6P is configured in
closed-loop mode with industrial encoder. Therefore,

CNF.00: Maximum load in car in kilograms. Range from 200 up to 3000.

ENC.00: Number of pulses per encoder turn. Range: 500…5000. Default value: 2000.

6.2.4. Viewing

There is only one viewing for this weighing control feature monitoring (refer to chapter 7): Weight. The possible
values of this viewing are:

Value in kilograms registered by VK2P, positive or negative, depending on the car situation and its load. Or,

“PSoEr”, if there is a connection problem or if VK2P is not connected to 3VFMAC-DSP 6P.

V0.01 – 04/2013 36 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

7. Monitoring
7.1. General

3VFMAC-DSP 6P enables the viewing in real time of the most relevant electric, dynamic and control magnitudes:
current consumption of the motor, speed, target speed, voltage of capacitors, encoder reading of pulses, etc.

The monitoring and viewing of these magnitudes are available in RUN mode only, both in idle state or running.

The viewing main aim of these magnitudes is to enable checking the proper functioning of the encoder and
installation as well. Therefore, these viewings can and should be used as a tool for detection, debugging and
solving problems that may affect the inverter.

7.2. Console handling

Let us remind that the console or user interface of 3VFMAC-DSP 6P consists of five 7 segment- displays and four
buttons which are set out as shown in the following figure:

FIGURE 7.1

The actions associated to each button in monitoring mode are shown in the following table:

BUTTON ACTION

If the inverter is in RUN mode and in idle state (without providing energy),
change it to SETUP mode.

When a service is running, pressing this button does not produce any effect.

It changes to the next viewing.

For two seconds it will display the value legend and, after, it will display the
magnitude value.

If the active magnitude is the last one, it will change to the first one.

It changes to the previous viewing.

For two seconds it will display the value legend and, after, it will display the
magnitude value.

If the active magnitude is the first one, it will change to the last one.

It displays the magnitude legend that is being visualised for two seconds.

After, it displays again the value.

TABLE 7.1

V0.01 – 04/2013 37 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

There are two special viewings that are exceptions to the above:

a) Main viewing. According to regulations in force, the inverter must inform whether the lift is moving
upwards or downwards and, also, if there is a speed deviation in regard with the target speed.

DIRECTION SPEED

D1 D2 D4 D5
STOPPED
- - 10% SPEED DEVIATION.
O U BLINKING.
D3
GOING DOWN
d n

- - OTHERWISE
GOING UP
U P

FIGURE 7.2

When another viewing is selected and the console is not touched for 3 minutes, the inverter will
automatically change to this viewing mode.

This viewing special feature is that it does not have any associated legend. Therefore, when the button

is pressed, there is no effect and when this viewing is selected, no text appears.

b) Viewing of errors. The present software versions, both for synchronous and asynchronous, record the
last 32 errors. These errors can be visualised on the console, organised from the most recent to the
oldest.
When from the previous or next viewing we change to this one, the legend UErr appears. This viewing
special feature is that, when the button
is pressed, we change to the next oldest error and we will
never be able to see again the text UErr.
The console functioning in monitoring mode is summarized in the following diagram.

First/Main viewing Viewing 1 Viewing 2 Viewing 3

Last Viewing Viewing 4

.

Error Viewing
FIGURE 7.3

V0.01 – 04/2013 38 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

As noteworthy and common aspects for synchronous and asynchronous viewings, let us say that:

a) The main viewing is always the first. In addition, if no button of the console is touched for three minutes
3VFMAC-DSP 6P will set the main viewing as the active one.

b) At any moment, we can know the displayed magnitude by pressing the button
, except when displaying the
main viewing and the error viewing.

c) We can move forwards and backwards along the displayed magnitudes with the buttons  and ⊳,
respectively. Furthermore, when we are on the first viewing, the previous one is the last one and when we are on
the last viewing, the next one is the first one.

V0.01 – 04/2013 39 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

7.3. Asynchronous version monitoring

POSITION VIEWING GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1) Two first digits: Indicate the motion direction

2) Two last digits: Indicate speed deviation above 10%.

STATE D1 D2 D3 D4 D5

Stopped - - - -
0 Main viewing N/A N/A
Upward u p
N/A N/A
Downward d n
N/A N/A
Speed deviation ≤ 10% - -
N/A N/A
Speed deviation > 10% O U
1 Frec Target Frequency (Hz)
2 Encod Encoder pulses
3 int s V-phase current (digital units)
4 int r U-phase current (digital units)
5 Ad in Effective current or output to motor rms (Amperes)
6 tens Bus voltage (Dc volts)
7 Uerr Last 32 errors’ viewing
8 int d Measured Magnetizing Current (Amperes)
9 int u Measured Torque Current (Amperes)
10 UEL Measured speed (electric Hz)
11 rEU Measured speed (r.p.m.)
12 EiUEL Speed control Integral Term error (digital units)
13 EPUEL Speed control Proportional Term error (digital units)
14 An Electrical angle
Voltage vector Magnetisation Component of the output to motor
15 Udd
(digital units)
Voltage vector Torque Component of the output to motor (digital
16 Uud
units)
17 UdE Voltage vector X-Component of the output to motor (digital units)
18 UuE Voltage vector Y-Component of the output to motor (digital units)
19 SEno Electrical angle sine (digital units)
20 CoSE Electrical angle cosine (digital units)
21 iurEF Reference torque current (digital units)
22 USlip Sliding (digital units)
23 UrEF Reference mechanical speed (digital units)
24 PEso Weight (Kg.), if VK2P connected
25 Uer Software version
26 SEriE Equipment serial number
27 nboot Number of inverter start-ups
28 E1 Sliding stated in electrical hertz
29 E2 Voltage applied on the motor (V)
30 E3 Reference mechanical speed in Hz*128
31 E4 Control Output Iq with filtered speed
32 E5 Electrical frequency
33 E6 Speed control proportional constant
34 E7 Speed control integral constant
35 E8 Weight offset
36 E9 Interpretation of Parameter VEL.10
37 E10 Maximum torque current (digital units)
38 E11 Effective current minimum value in an electric cycle (digital units)
39 E12 Reference magnetizing current
40 E13 Operation command
Electrical frequency offset 1 at a stop due to torque compensation
41 E14
(Hz*100)
Approach speed 1 calculated according to torque compensation
42 E15
(Hz*100)
43 E16 Sinusoidal curve time (ms)
44 E17 Machine control variable for torque compensation states
TABLE 7.2

V0.01 – 04/2013 40 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

7.4. Synchronous version monitoring

Due to the higher number of control variables in synchronous machines, viewings have been structured in blocks.

On one hand, there is a main block that will always be visible and displays the basic viewing magnitudes. On the
other hand, there is a group of 4 blocks that can be visible by using parameter CNF.06:

CNF.06

Data Block 1 Display Setting

Data Block 1 Display Setting

Not used

Not used

Not used
FIGURE 7.4

If the digit associated to each block is equal to 1, the block will be displayed. Otherwise, it will be hidden. The key
associated to the viewings of these additional blocks will include the block number and the position of the digit
within the block. For example, viewing 3 of block 2 would be represented as follows:

B 1 2. 0 3
FIGURE 7.5

Please remember that block 0 or main block will ALWAYS be visible.

V0.01 – 04/2013 41 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

7.4.1. Block 0: main block

POSITION VIEWING GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1) Two first digits: Indicate motion direction

2) Two last digits:

In normal or automatic rescue operation with batteries,

indicate deviation above 10% of speed.

In the case of rescue operation without batteries, if the

acceleration ramp is being used (balance situation),
indicate, as in the previous case, deviation above 10% of
the speed. If it shifts to unbalance mode (unbalance
situation), the letters dC will flash.

STATE D1 D2 D3 D4 D5

0 Main viewing Stopped

- - - -
Upward
u p N/A N/A

Downward
d n N/A N/A

Speed deviation
≤ 10%
N/A N/A - -
Speed deviation
> 10%
N/A N/A O U
Unbalanced load
rescue
N/A N/A d C
1 Frec Target Frequency (Hz)
2 FOut Output electrical frequency (Hz)
3 rEU Measured speed (r.p.m.)
4 Ad in Effective current or output to motor rms (Amperes)
5 tens Bus voltage (Vdc)
6 int d Measured Magnetisation current (Amperes)
7 int u Measured Torque Current (Amperes)
8 Uerr Last 32 errors’ viewing
9 Pabs Last absolute position reading
10 nboot Number of inverter start-ups.
11 Uer Software version

TABLE 7.3

V0.01 – 04/2013 42 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

7.4.2. Block 1: sinusoidal and absolute encoder

POSITION GENERAL DESCRIPTION

0 Last absolute position reading
1 Sinusoidal encoder channel A reading
2 Sinusoidal encoder channel B reading
3 Minimum sinusoidal encoder channel A current cycle.
4 Minimum sinusoidal encoder channel A current cycle.
5 Minimum sinusoidal encoder channel B current cycle.
6 Minimum sinusoidal encoder channel B current cycle.
7 Position relating to the sinusoidal encoder’s current cycle
8 Cycles
9 Turn
10 Electrical angle
11 Minimum value average of sinusoidal encoder channel A
12 Maximum value average of sinusoidal encoder channel A
13 Minimum value average of sinusoidal encoder channel B
14 Maximum value average of sinusoidal encoder channel B
15 Sinusoidal encoder channel A zero
16 Sinusoidal encoder channel B zero
17 Sinusoidal encoder amplitude adjustment

TABLE 7.4

7.4.3. Block 2: current data

POSITION GENERAL DESCRIPTION

0 V-phase current (digital units)
1 U-phase current (digital units)
2 Electrical Angle (digital units)

TABLE 7.5

V0.01 – 04/2013 43 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

8. PARAMETERS
8.1. General

The inverter parameters have been structured in pages or groups. Each page can contain up to 16 parameters and
is identified with an acronym of three letters.

Each parameter is identified by the group acronym to which it belongs and a 2-digit number, with a value from 0
to 15 that determines its position or order into the page. For instance: the acronym “CNF” has been assigned to
the page “General configuration”. This page first parameter is “Type of Control” and the second one, “Type of
inverter”. The way of appointing each parameter will be CNF.00 and CNF.01 respectively.

Whenever we enter the programming mode, we must give an access code. The access level of each parameter is
determined by this key and, in some case, by the value of other parameters.

There are three access codes: Normal, Advanced and Default. On the other hand, there are three access levels per
each parameter: Reading/Writing, Reading only and Not visible.

In the tables of this chapter, each parameter access level corresponding to each access code will be determined.

Example 1: To modify any VEL group parameter, the access to programming mode with advanced key is required.
Otherwise, it will appear as “Reading only”.

Example 2: The VEL group parameters will be visible only if the parameter CNF.00 = 1, i.e., if the inverter has
been configured in closed-loop mode.

The parameters can be adjusted from the inverter console itself or by using the PC program MPConfig (refer to
chapter 13, section 13.1).

8.2. Console handling in programming mode

Let us remind that the console or user interface of 3VFMAC-DSP 6P consists of five 7 segment- displays and four
buttons which are set out as shown in the following figure:

The action or actions assigned to each button depend on the context or level in which we are at each moment. The
way to know in which level or context we are at each moment is the information shown on the displays.

V0.01 – 04/2013 44 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

For the console handling in programming mode, four levels described in the here below table have been defined:

LEVEL/CONTEXT BUTTON ACTION DESCRIPTION

Access code P/R Accept the key 1. To change from RUN mode to SETUP or
editing PROGRAM mode, press the button P/R.
Select the next digit to

the active one
2. The blinking digit is the active one at each
Select the previous digit
⊳ time.
to the active one
Increase the digit value
3. The leftmost digit before the point is the
access level digit:
0: Normal access level
1: Advanced access level
2: Default level. Reserved.

3. The key associated to the selected access level

has to be entered in the other four digits. Each
digit value is 0..9, A..F.


4. To accept the entered key, press the button
P/R.

If it is the right key, “SETUP” will blink, and

after that we will change to the group level.

Otherwise, we will remain on access code

editing mode.

Groups or pages P/R Exit the PROGRAMMING or SETUP mode.

 Select next group.

⊳ Select previous group.

Change to parameter level, i.e., the parameters of the selected group are


displayed.
Parameters P/R Change back to group level.
(into a page)
 Select the next parameter.
⊳ Select the previous parameter.

Change to editing mode of parameters.
Parameter editing Accept the edited value 1. The blinking digit is the active one at each
P/R
as the new parameter. time.
Select the next digit to
 2. The permitted values for each digit are 0..9.
the active one.
Select the previous digit
⊳ 3. To accept the entered value, press the button
to the active one.
Increase the digit value. P/R.

If it is the right value, “Po” will blink, and

after that we will change back to the level of
parameters.


Otherwise, “PErr” will blink, the previous
value will be restored and we will remain on
editing mode of parameters.

TABLE 8.1

V0.01 – 04/2013 45 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

Here after, we show in a schematic way the global functioning of the console in terms of programming:

1. ENTRY IN SETUP
P/R P/R 1s

P/R P/R
3. Parameter level within a page
...
...

4. Parameter
Editing Level
P/R

1s

SCHEME 8.1

V0.01 – 04/2013 46 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

8.3. Parameters of asynchronous version

This table of parameters is valid from version 911A. It applies to asynchronous machines only.

As already mentioned in previous section 8.1, the access level of each parameter is mainly determined by the
access code to the programming mode. In the here below table, there are two columns under the heading access
code:

N: Normal access level

A: Advanced access level

The permissions for each parameter are given in accordance with the access code:

RW: Reading /Writing

RO: Reading only
H: Hidden

ACCESS
PAGE/ DEFAULT
PARAM DESCRIPTION LEVEL DESCRIPTION OF VALUES RANGE
GROUP VALUE
N A
This parameter will determine whether it operates in 0: Open loop
CNF.00 Type of Control RW RW 1
open or closed loop. 1: Closed loop
2: 10 HP/400 Vac
3: 10 HP/220 Vac According to
CNF.01 Type of inverter RO RO Model of inverter concerning feeding and power.
4: 15 HP/400 Vac model
6: 20 HP/400 Vac
Digit 1 (from right)
Maximum no. of errors that may occur in 3 minutes.
After this period, the inverter is locked until one of the
following operations is carried out:
- Cut off power
- Activate terminal 19
- Enter programming

Digit 2 (from right)

It sets up the phases unbalance error detection (err12). Digit 1: 0..5
The inverter uses two independent algorithms, the
standard one and the strict one, to detect it: Digit 2: 0..3
0: Activation of both algorithms: standard and
strict. Digit 3: 0,1
CNF.02 Autoreset RW RW 5
1: Standard activated and strict deactivated.
2: Standard deactivated and strict activated. Digit 4: 0,1
3: Both of them deactivated (not recommended).
Digit 5: 0
Digit 3 (from right): Contactors state check setup while
CNF inverter is stopped.
General
Configuration 0: Enabled
1: Disabled

Digit 4 (from right): Current sensors check setup.

0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Source of the Specifies whether the commands will be given through 0: Terminals
CNF.03 RW RW 0
commands the terminals or CAN. 1: CAN
0: Deactivated
1: Current
Specifies whether you wish to activate the CAN
CNF.04 CAN Monitor RW RW Interface 0
monitoring or not and, if yes, you determine which one.
2: Voltage
Interface
CNF.07 Default Test Mode RO RO Reserved Reserved 0
Parameter access
CNF.08 RW H In both cases, it specifies the client code to access the 0...9999 0
client code
parameters. It is done this way so that no value that
Parameter access
CNF.09 RW H may prevent parameterising is entered accidentally. 0...9999 0
client code
Number at the
Informs of the equipment’s serial number. This value is lower right
CNF.10 Serial Number RO RO 0...65535
unique for each equipment. corner.
ADA-NNNNN
Informs of the software version engraved on the
CNF.11 Software Version RO RO Not applicable 911
equipment.

TR0.00 Inspection Speed RW RW Inspection operation speed (maintenance). 5.00...65.00 Hz 15.00 Hz

Output electrical frequency (open-loop) or motor

TR0 rotation speed (closed-loop mode) that, when exceeded,
Travelling. switches the KRL1 relay. At (0Hz), RL1 is not activated
General (terminals 30 _ 31 and 32).
Parameters 0.00,0.25...45.00
TR0.01 Speed Limit RW RW 0.00 Hz
IMPORTANT Hz
THE VALUE OF THIS PARAMETER MUST BE 0.00 IF A3
AMENDMENT IS ENABLED (A3A.00=1 or 2)

V0.01 – 04/2013 47 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

ACCESS
PAGE/ DEFAULT
PARAM DESCRIPTION LEVEL DESCRIPTION OF VALUES RANGE
GROUP VALUE
N A
Allows configuring the speed limit relay logic. With
positive logic (1), the relay will turn ON when the speed
is above the pre-set limit, and OFF when below. With
negative logic (0), the relay will turn ON when the speed
is below the pre-set limit or stopped, and OFF when
above the limit. Speed is understood as output electrical
Speed limit relay 0: Negative logic
TR0.02 RW RW Frequency in open-loop mode or motor rotation speed in 1
logic 1: Positive logic
closed-loop mode.

IMPORTANT

THIS PARAMETER APPLIES IF PARAMETER A3A.00 IS

SET TO 0 (A3 AMENDMENT DISABLED).

TR1.00 Rated speed RW RW Rated speed 1 10.00...65.00 Hz 50.00 Hz

TR1.01 Approach speed RW RW Approach speed 1 01.00...15.00 Hz 05.00 Hz
TR1.02 Acceleration time RW RW Acceleration ramp time 00.30...10.00 s 02.50 s
The higher the value, the softer the beginning of the
Modification
curve and the harder at the end. Only operative in
TR1 TR1.03 Factor for RW RW 0.10...15.00 1.50
Sinusoidal curve (RSN.00 = 2).
Travelling Acceleration curve
Value 1 = neutral
TR1.04 Deceleration time RW RW Deceleration ramp 1 time 00.30...10.00 s 02.20 s
Modification The higher the value, the gentler the beginning of the
TR1.05 Factor for RW RW curve and less gentle at the end. 0.10...15.00 1.00
Deceleration curve Value 1 = neutral

TR2.00 Rated Speed RW RW Rated speed 2 10.00...65.00 Hz 30.00 Hz

TR2.01 Approach speed RW RW Approach speed 2 01.00...15.00 Hz 05.00 Hz
TR2.02 Acceleration time RW RW Acceleration ramp 2 time 00.30...10.00 s 01.00 s
Modification The higher the value, the softer the beginning of the
TR2
TR2.03 Factor for RW RW curve and the harder at the end. 0.10...15.00 1.00
Travelling Unit
Acceleration curve Value 1 = neutral
2
TR2.04 Deceleration time RW RW Deceleration ramp 2 time 00.30...10.00 s 01.50 s
Modification The higher the value, the gentler the beginning of the
TR2.05 Factor for RW RW curve and less gentle at the end. 0.10...15.00 1.00
Deceleration curve Value 1 = neutral

0: Standard
RSN.00 S-type Curve RW RW S-type Curve 2
2: Sinusoidal
Acceleration Initial Gentleness at the beginning of the acceleration ramp.
RSN.01 RW RW 1...999 50
K Higher number: Greater gentleness
Gentleness at the end of the acceleration ramp. Higher
RSN.02 Acceleration End K RW RW 1...999 50
number: Greater gentleness
RSN
Deceleration Gentleness at the beginning of the deceleration ramp.
Normal RSN.03 RW RW 1...999 10
beginning K Higher number: Greater gentleness
S-Curves
Deceleration End Gentleness at the end of the deceleration ramp. Higher
RSN.04 RW RW 1...999 50
K number: Greater gentleness
Stopping curve
RSN.05 RW RW Time in milliseconds of the stopping curve 1...3000 0.800
time
Levelling
RSN.06 RW RW Levelling adjustment by load compensation 0..200 100
adjustment

Extension time in Stated in milliseconds; in short floor: It is the time the

RSC.00 RW RW 0...6000 0.000
RSC short floor speed maintains at which a gear is changed.
Short S-ramp Stated in %. The higher it is the gentler speed
Target increase
RSC.01 RW RW rectification in short floor (thus reducing the approach 0...100 50
percentage
section).

Pre-start brake Delay between brake activation command and start of

STC.00 RW RW 00.01...02.50 s 00.30 s
delay motor spinning.
Brake prior to
STC.01 RW RW Time elapsed between speed 0 and brake deactivation. 00.01...02.50 s 00.20 s
stop delay
Brake after stop Time elapsed between brake deactivation and motor
STC.02 RW RW 00.01...02.50 s 00.50 s
delay power failure at a stop;
Waiting time of
STC.03 contactor RO RO Stated in seconds. 00.01...01.00 s 00.15 s
switching at start
Digits 1,2:
00...99 cHz
STC
Start/Stop Speed hysteresis Digits 1, 2 (from right): Upper limit
STC.04 RO RW Digits 3,4: 00.10
Control at stopping Digits 3, 4 (from right): Lower limit
00...99 cHz

Digit 5: 0
Current value
STC.05 H RO Stated in digital units 1...33 5
close to 0
Maximum time
STC.06 allowed for a H RO Stated in seconds. 00.01...02.50 s 1.00 s
current drop
Additional time for
STC.07 residual current to H RO Stated in seconds. 00.01...02.50 s 0.02 s
be equal to zero

10 HP:
450 Kg
PSO Car Maximum Car maximum load in kilograms. Only operative when 15 HP:
PSO.00 RW RW 50...3000 Kg
Weight control Load the weight control function is available 630 Kg
20 HP:
900 Kg

V0.01 – 04/2013 48 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

ACCESS
PAGE/ DEFAULT
PARAM DESCRIPTION LEVEL DESCRIPTION OF VALUES RANGE
GROUP VALUE
N A
Additional torque expressed as a ratio (%) of the rated
Additional torque
PSO.01 RW RW torque applied to the maximum load. Only operative 0 – 50 0
%
when the weight control function is available

ENC Number of 4..8,

ENC.00 RW RW Number of pulses per encoder turn 2000
Encoder pulses/turn 500...5000

RO Determines whether the motor is synchronous or 0: Asynchronous 0

DRI.00 Type of Motor RO
asynchronous. or induction
Constant of rotor RW RW 10.0 – 1000.0 ms 90.0 ms
DRI.01 Constant of rotor time when operating as motor.
time as motor
Constant of rotor
DRI.02 RW RW Constant of rotor time when operating as generator. 10.0 – 1000.0 ms 90.0 ms
time as generator
Number of motor poles. NOT THE NUMBER OF POLE 2...50, Even
DRI.03 Number of poles RW RW 4
PAIRS. Number
10/400:
17.8 A

DRI 10/220:
Machine Data 35.5 A
Motor rated This parameter specifies the rated current of the
DRI.07 RW RW 2.0..35.5 A
current machine’s nameplate.
15/400:
26.7 A

20/400:
31.8 A
Specifies the motor model. On doing it, no-load current,
rotor time constants and number of pole pairs
0, machine table
DRI.08 Motor Model RO RW associated to the machine are determined. 0
codes (1)
See Machine Table below.

10/400:
10.0 A

10/220:
15.0 A
No-load current Corresponds to the motor’s no-load current. Normally,
INT.00 RW RW 2.0..24.0 A
(Id) do not modify default value.
15/400:
12.0 A

20/400:
14.0 A

10/400:
10.0 A

Gradually increase it until obtaining the correct 0/220:

operation of the lift in all the loading situations 15.0 A
INT.01 Starting current RW RW 2.0..24.0 A
(including the maximum one). DO NOT EXCEED IT.
Only valid in open-loop control. 15/400:
12.0 A
INT
Current 20/400:
Control 14.0 A
The gradient between the speed control output Iq and
the control system Iq is:
INT.02 Torque (Iq) Filter RO RW 0...10 5
(Speed control Iq – Control system Iq)
2(INT.01)
Id Current Control
INT.03 Proportional RO RW Stated in digital units 1...2048 250
Constant
Id Current Control
INT.04 Integral RO RO Stated in digital units 0...512 1
Constant
Iq Current Control
INT.05 Proportional RO RW Stated in digital units 1...2048 250
Constant
Iq Current Control
INT.06 Integral RO RO Stated in digital units 0...512 1
Constant
At rated speed, no-load current applied is INT.00.
Over-magnetizing
INT.07 RO RW At speed 0, INT.00 + (INT.00 x INT.06) / 100. 0...50 0
current
NOT VALID IN OPEN-LOOP.

Starting Prop
VEL.00 RW RW Stated in digital units 1...64000 4000
Constant
Rated Speed
VEL.01 Proportional RW RW Stated in digital units 1...64000 4000
Constant
Rated Speed
VEL.02 Integral RW RW Stated in digital units 0...1024 20
VEL
Constant
Speed Control
Approach Speed
VEL.03 Control
RW RW Stated in digital units 1...64000 4000
Proportional
Constant
Approach Speed
VEL.04 Control Integral RW RW Stated in digital units 0...1024 20
Constant

V0.01 – 04/2013 49 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

ACCESS
PAGE/ DEFAULT
PARAM DESCRIPTION LEVEL DESCRIPTION OF VALUES RANGE
GROUP VALUE
N A
Control Integral
VEL.05 Constant of Speed
RW RW Stated in digital units 0...1024 15
during
Stopping Curve
VEL.06 Reserved
The gradient between the motor’s measured W and the
W used in speed control and frequency generation is:
VEL.07 Motor’s measured
RO RW 0...10 3
speed filter (Motor’s W measured – W control)
2(VEL.06)

Stated in milliseconds. Once stability has been reached,

VEL.08 Time for speed
RO RW the integral term is applicable. At approach speed, 0...3.000 0.512
stability criterion
applicable if the digit 0 of VEL.10 is set to 0.
VEL.09 Stability time in Stated in milliseconds. Only operative when bit 1 of
RO RW 0...3.000 0.512
Approach VEL.10 is set at 1.
If the digit 1 (from right) is set to 1, an Id, Iq, We
constant control will be carried out in approach. Set to
the value 0.

If the digit 2 (from right) is set to 1, an Id, Iq, We

constant control will be carried out at a stop. Set to the 0 or 1 every digit
value 0 (activate with low inertia machine). Digits 1, 2, 3, 4:
VEL.10 Speed control RO RW 0,1 1000
- If the digit 3 (from right) is set to 1, speed control will
only operate when a new speed has been detected. Digit 5 : 0
If set to 0, it always operates.

- If digit 4 (from right) is set to 1, “overboost” function

will be activated. If set to 0, it deactivates. It only
applies in closed loops with low cost encoder (magnets).

Switching
PEC.00 RW RW 05.500 KHz 5.5 – 20.0 KHz 15.0 KHz
frequency
PEC Type of 0:PWM Triangular
PEC.01 RW RW Type of modulation 0
Power modulation 1:Space Vector
Electronic 00.500..03.000
PEC.02 Dead-time H RO Value in microseconds 00.500 µs
Inverter µs
Minimum pulse 00.000..03.000
PEC.03 H RO Value in microseconds 00.000 µs
width µs

ADJ ADJ.00 Ir read gain RO RO Stated in digital units 0...65535

Channel ADJ.01 Is read gain RO RO Stated in digital units 0...65535
adjustment
ADJ.02 Vdc1 read gain RO RO Stated in digital units 0...65535

0: Disabled
1: Enabled,
WITHOUT
detection of
Specifies the activation/deactivation and configuration of favourable
RES.00 Rescue Mode RW RW 0
RES the rescue mode. direction
Enabled, WITH
Rescue detection of
favourable
direction
Speed in rescue
RES.01 RW RW Specifies the speed in rescue mode 0.10..15.00 Hz 5.00 Hz
mode
RES.02 Starting voltage RW RW Specifies the percentage of bus voltage at staring 2.0-90.0% 60%

TST
0: NO
TST.00 Test mode RW RW Specifies whether the test mode is activated or not. 0
Test 1: YES

It is used to adjust the current sensors’ amplitude with

an error below 1% with reference to the output rated
current.

The adjustment must be carried out as follows:

1) Set the control board either in inspection or MES

mode.

TUN 2) Set TUN.01 = 1

Current sensors’ 0: Deactivated
TUN.01 RW RW 0
Adjustments adjustment 3) After quitting SETUP, AdJin StArt will flash. 1: Activated

4) Keep the up or down button pressed down until AdJin

End appears on the display.
During the process, AdJ01, AdJ02, etc. will appear.

IMPORTANT NOTE: During the process, the lift does

NOT move and the brake is NOT activated. As a result,
the button pressed (up or down) does not matter, NO
car/counterweight has to be hung, nor any other
operation must be carried out in the installation.

V0.01 – 04/2013 50 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

ACCESS
PAGE/ DEFAULT
PARAM DESCRIPTION LEVEL DESCRIPTION OF VALUES RANGE
GROUP VALUE
N A
0: Deactivated
1: Activated,
A3 amendment This parameter specifies whether the function associated
A3A A3A.00 RW RW automatic reset 1
activation to A3 amendment is activated.
2: Activated,
A3 manual reset
Amendment Time of Delay between uncontrolled contactor opening and
A3A.01 RW RW 1.00..10.00 s 4.00 s
interlocking interlocking activation.
Maximum waiting time for the activation of release
A3A.02 Time of release RW RW 0.10..2.50 s 1.20 s
output.

TABLE 8.2

(1) The parameter DRI.08 (code of motor model) is a fictitious parameter. When entering the motor code, the
parameters of no load current (INT.00), number of poles (DRI.03) and machine constants (DRI.01, DRI.02) are
set. However, their values do not remain.

For instance: We edit the parameter DRI.08 and enter the value 204. In so doing, the console display will l show
“Po” blinking, i.e. the entered value is right. The parameters DRI.01, DRI.02, DRI.03 and INT.00 have been set to
88.5, 88.5, 4 and 14.2, respectively. If we edit once again the value of DRI.08, 0 will appear once more.

The following table shows the possible values for this parameter (a code for each motor type) and the associated
values of the mentioned parameters.

MACHINE
INT.00 (A)
DRI.08 BRAND MODEL HP KW DRI.03 CONSTANTS (ms)
400 V 230 V DRI.01 DRI.02

100 REIVAJ 075.22.0.30 7.5 5.5 4 8.0 13.9 79.4 79.4

101 REIVAJ 095.22.0.60 9.5 7 4 9.9 17.2 78.4 78.4

102 REIVAJ 130.20.0.90 7.5 5.5 6 10.5 18.2 50.3 50.3

103 REIVAJ 145.20.0.90 9.5 7 6 13.5 23.4 51.7 51.7

104 REIVAJ 055.22.0.61 5.5 4 4 7.0 12.5 64.5 64.5

200 SASSI 240095A-WF4 5.5 4 4 4.7 8.1 82.3 82.3

201 SASSI 240095A-WF4 8.0 5.9 4 8.4 14.6 71.6 71.6

202 SASSI 240118A-WF4 10.0 7.35 4 9.6 16.7 90.9 90.9

Not
203 SASSI 240142A-WF4 12.5 9.2 4 11.2 94.3 94.3
applicable
Not
204 SASSI 240142A-WF4 15.0 11 4 14.2 88.5 88.5
applicable
Not
205 SASSI 240171A-WF4 18.0 13.2 4 15.5 95.0 95.0
applicable

TABLE 8.3: Table of asynchronous machines

V0.01 – 04/2013 51 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

8.4. Parameters of synchronous version

This table of parameters is valid from version 613 or higher. It applies to synchronous machines only.

As already mentioned in previous section 8.1, the access level of each parameter is mainly determined by the
access code to the programming mode. In the here below table, there are two columns under the heading access
code:

N: Normal access level

A: Advanced access level

The permissions for each parameter are given in accordance with the access code:

RW: Reading /Writing

RO: Reading only
H: Hidden

ACCESS
PAGE/ LEVEL
DEFAULT
PARAM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION OF VALUES RANGE
GROUP VALUE
N A
2: 10 HP/400 Vac
Depending
3: 10 HP/220 Vac
CNF.01 Type of inverter RO RO Model of inverter concerning feeding and power. on the
4: 15 HP/400 Vac
model
6: 20 HP/400 Vac
Digit 1 (from the right):
Maximum no. of errors that may occur in 3
minutes. After this period, the inverter is locked
until one of the following operations is carried
out:
- Cut off power
- Activate terminal 19 Digit 0: 0...5
- Enter programming
Digit 1: 3
Digit 2 (from right):
3: Strict and standard Out of phase error control
CNF.02 Autoreset RW RW (err 12) deactivated. Digit 3: 0, 1 35

Digit 3 (from right): Contactors state check setup Digit 4: 0, 1

while inverter is stopped.
Digit 5: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled

Digit 4 (from right): Current sensors check setup

CNF 0: Enabled
General 1: Disabled
Configuration It is specified whether the source of the 0: Terminals
CNF.03 Command source RW RW 0
commands will be the terminals or the CAN. 1: CAN
0: Deactivated
It is specified whether monitoring via CAN is to be
CNF.04 CAN Monitor RW RW 1: Interface v1 0
activated
2: Interface v2
Direction of 0: Does not
Specifies whether the direction of movement is to
CNF.05 movement RW RW reverse 0
be reversed or not after a direction command
configuration 1: Reverses
Configures the viewing of the different viewing
blocks. Digit 1: 0, 1
Digit 1: (from the right): Viewing of sinusoidal Digit 2: 0, 1
Viewing block
CNF.06 RW RW and absolute encoder block. 1, visible. 0 not Digit 3: 0 0
configuration
visible. Digit 4: 0
Digit 2: Viewing of industrial encoder block. 1, Digit 5: 0
visible. 0 not visible.
Parameter access In both cases, it specifies the client code to access
CNF.08 RW H 0...9999 0
client code the parameters. It is done this way so that no
Parameter access value that may prevent parameterising is entered
CNF.09 RW H 0...9999 0
client code accidentally.
Number at
Informs of the equipment’s serial number. This the lower
CNF.10 Serial Number RO RO 0...65535
value is unique for each equipment. right corner.
ADA-NNNNN
Informs of the software version engraved on the
CNF.11 Software version RO RO N/A 613
equipment.

TR0.00 Inspection speed RW RW Inspection operation speed (maintenance). 0.20...65.00 Hz 5.00 Hz

Output electrical frequency (open-loop) or motor
rotation speed (closed-loop) that, when exceeded,
TR0
switches the KRL1 relay. At (0 Hz), RL1 is not
Travelling.
activated (terminals 30 _ 31 and 32). 0.00,0.05...
General TR0.01 Speed Limit RW RW 0.00 Hz
...45.00 Hz
Parameters
IMPORTANT
This parameter MUST BE set to 0.00 if A3
Amendment is enabled A3A.00 = 1 or 2)

V0.01 – 04/2013 52 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

ACCESS
PAGE/ LEVEL
DEFAULT
PARAM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION OF VALUES RANGE
GROUP VALUE
N A
Allows configuring the speed limit relay logic. With
positive logic (1), the relay will turn ON when the
speed is above the pre-set limit, and OFF when
below. With negative logic (0), the relay will turn
ON when the speed is below the pre-set limit or
stopped, and OFF when above the limit. Speed is
Speed limit relay understood as output electrical Frequency in 0: negative logic
TR0.02 RW RW 1
logic open-loop or motor rotation speed in closed-loop 1: positive logic
mode.

IMPORTANT

THIS PARAMETER APPLIES IF PARAMETER A3A.00

IS SET TO 0 (A3 AMENDMENT DISABLED).
Allows configuring overspeed detection. With a 0
value, overspeed is determined on 18% of rated
Overspeed speed.
TR0.03 RW RW 0..18 10%
percentage With a value between 10% and 18%, overspeed
is determined with this same percentage on the
target speed.

Rated speed 1

If the control is open-loop mode, the value of this

TR1.00 Rated speed RW RW parameter is the target electrical frequency. 1.00...65.00 Hz 10.00 Hz

If the control is closed-loop mode, the value of

this parameter is the target speed.
TR1 TR1.01 Approach speed RW RW Approach speed 1 00.01...20.00 Hz 01.00 Hz
Travelling 1 TR1.02 Acceleration time RW RW Acceleration ramp time 00.30...10.00 s 02.50 s
The higher the value, the gentler the beginning of
Modification Factor
the curve and less gentle at the end. Only
TR1.03 for Acceleration RW RW 0.10...15.00 01.50
operative in Sinusoidal curve (RSN.00 = 2). Value
curve
1 = neutral
TR1.04 Deceleration time RW RW Deceleration ramp 1 time 00.30...10.00 s 02.20 s
Modification Factor The higher the value, the gentler the beginning of
TR1.05 for Deceleration RW RW the curve and less gentle at the end. Value 1 = 0.10...15.00 1.00
curve neutral

Rated speed 2

If the control is open-loop mode, the value of this

TR2.00 Rated speed RW RW parameter is the target electrical frequency. 1.00...65.00 Hz 10.00 Hz

If the control is in closed-loop mode, the value of

this parameter is the target speed.
TR2 TR2.01 Approach speed RW RW Approach speed 2 00.01...20.00 Hz 01.00 Hz
Travelling
TR2.02 Acceleration time RW RW Acceleration ramp 2 time 00.30...10.00 s 01.00 s
Unit 2
Modification Factor The higher the value, the gentler the beginning of
TR2.03 for Acceleration RW RW the curve and less gentle at the end. Value 1 = 0.10...15.00 1.00
curve neutral
TR2.04 Deceleration time RW RW Deceleration ramp 2 time 00.30...10.00 s 01.50 s
Modification Factor The higher the value, the gentler the beginning of
TR2.05 for Deceleration RW RW the curve and less gentle at the end. Value 1 = 0.10...15.00 1.00
curve neutral

This parameter allows enabling/disabling the 0: Enabled

ARR.00 Linear start RW RW 0
ARR initial speed ramp. 1: Disabled
Start ARR.01 First Gear RW RW Final speed of initial speed ramp stated in hertz. 0.01..5.00 0.10
ARR.02 Initial Time RW RW Time of initial ramp stated in seconds. 0.10..5.00 1.50

0: Standard
RSN.00 S-type Curve RW RW S-type Curve 2
2: Sinusoidal
Acceleration Gentleness at the beginning of the acceleration
RSN.01 RW RW 1...999 50
Beginning K ramp. Higher number: Greater gentleness
Gentleness at the end of the acceleration ramp.
RSN.02 Acceleration End K RW RW 1...999 50
Higher number: Greater gentleness
RSN
Deceleration Gentleness at the beginning of the deceleration
Normal RSN.03 RW RW 1...999 10
Beginning K ramp. Higher number: Greater gentleness
S-ramp
Gentleness at the end of the deceleration ramp.
RSN.04 Deceleration End K RW RW 1...999 50
Higher number: Greater gentleness
Stopping curve
RSN.05 RW RW Time with milliseconds accuracy of stopping curve 0.001...3.000 s 0.800
time
Levelling
RSN.06 RW RW Levelling adjustment by load compensation 0..200 100
adjustment

Stated with milliseconds accuracy, in short floor,

Extension time in
RSC.00 RW RW it is the time the speed maintains at which a gear 0.000...6.000 s 0.000
RSC short floor
is changed.
Short
Stated in %. The higher it is the gentler speed
S-Ramp Command increase
RSC.01 RW RW rectification in short floor (thus reducing the 0...100 70
percentage
approach section).

Pre-start brake Delay between brake activation command and

STC.00 RW RW 00.01...02.50 s 00.80 s
delay start of motor spinning;
Brake prior to stop Time elapsed between speed 0 and brake
STC.01 RW RW 00.01...02.50 s 01.00 s
STC delay deactivation.
Start/Stop Brake after stop Time elapsed between brake deactivation and
STC.02 RW RW 00.01...02.50s 00.50s
Control delay motor power failure at a stop.
Waiting time of
Specifies the waiting time for contactor switching
STC.03 contactor switching RO RW 00.01...01.00 s 00.25 s
at a start, stated in seconds.
at start

V0.01 – 04/2013 53 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

ACCESS
PAGE/ LEVEL
DEFAULT
PARAM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION OF VALUES RANGE
GROUP VALUE
N A
STC.04 0 speed at a stop R RW Speed close to 0 at a stop. 00.01...1.99 Hz 00.10 Hz
Current value close Specifies the current value close to 0 stated in
STC.05 H RO 1...33 5
to 0 digital units.
Maximum time
Specifies the maximum time allowed for a current
STC.06 allowed for a H RO 00.01...02.50 s 1.00 s
drop stated in seconds.
current drop
Additional time for
Specifies the additional time for residual current
STC.07 residual current to H RO 00.01...02.50 s 0.02 s
to be equal to zero stated in seconds.
be equal to zero.
0: Reset/Error
Determines the role of pin 19 in XC2 connector 1: N/Open Brake
microswitches
Brake microswitch IMPORTANT reading/activated
STC.08 RW RW 0
reading This parameter MUST BE set to 2 if A3 2: N/Closed Brake
Amendment is enabled (A3A.00 = 1 or 2) microswitches
reading/deactivat
ed
It determines the time current drop once the
STC.09 Current drop time RW RW 0.00..3.00 1.00
brake has been activated.

Number of 512, 1024, 2048,

ENC.00 RW RW Number of pulses per encoder turn 2048
pulses/turn. 4096

Digit 1: 1
This parameter is used to depict the sinusoidal
encoder being used. Digit 2: 2
ENC
Encoder Digit 1 (from the right): Digit 3: 0
ENC.01 RW RW 21
1: Sinusoidal Encoder
Digit 4: 0
Digit 2 (from the right):
2: Endat protocol absolute encoder Digit 5: 0

Number of motor poles. NOT THE NUMBER OF 2...50

DRI.03 Number of poles RW RW N/A
POLE PAIRS. Even Number
DRI.04 Resistance RO RO Machine resistance, stated in ohms. N/A N/A
DRI.05 Time constant RO RO Machine time constant stated in milliseconds. N/A N/A
DRI.06 Inductance RO RO Machine inductance, stated in mH. N/A N/A
10/400:

17.8 A

10/220:

35.5 A
This parameter specifies the rated current of the
DRI DRI.07 Motor rated current RW RW 2.0..31.8 A
machine’s nameplate.
Machine Data 15/400:

26.7 A

20/400:

31.8 A
Specifies the motor model. On doing it, the
complete profile of the specified machine is
incorporated. 0, machine table
DRI.08 Motor Model RW RW 0
codes
See Machine Table below.

Id Current Control
Proportional
INT.03 RO RW Stated in V/A. 1...250 10
Constant

Id Current Integral
INT.04 Time RO RW Integration time. Stated in seconds. 0.0000..6.5535 33.0

Iq Current Control
Proportional
INT.05 RO RW Stated in V/A. 1...250 10
Constant

Iq Current Control
INT.06 Integral Constant RO RW Integration time. Stated in seconds. 0.0000..6.5535 33.0

INT 0: Disabled
Current 1: 50 Hz
Control 2: 150 Hz
3: 250 Hz
2nd order filter and 4: 400 Hz
Allows configuring the 2nd order filter and the
INT.09 advance/delay RW RW 5: 250 Hz (2) 2
advance-delay network.
network 6: Slot 1
7: Slot 2
8: 250 Hz (3)
9: 250 Hz (4)
10: 150 Hz (2)
0: After the
contactors’
activation
INT.10 Offset Moment RO RW Determines when the offset is established. 0
1: Before the
contactors’
activation

V0.01 – 04/2013 54 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

ACCESS
PAGE/ LEVEL
DEFAULT
PARAM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION OF VALUES RANGE
GROUP VALUE
N A
VEL.00 Start Prop Constant RW RW Stated in digital units 1...64000 25000
Rated Speed
Control
VEL.01 Proportional RW RW Stated in digital units 1...64000 25000
Constant

Rated Speed
Control Integral 0.0000,
VEL.02 RW RW Integration time. Stated in seconds. 0.2000
Time 0.0100..6.5535

Approach Speed
Control
VEL.03 Proportional RW RW Stated in digital units. 1...64000 25000
Constant

Approach Speed
Control Integral 0.0000,
VEL.04 RW RW Integration time. Stated in seconds. 0.2000
Time 0.0100..6.5535
VEL
Speed Control
Stop Speed
Integral Time 0.0000,
VEL.05 RW RW Integration time. Stated in seconds. 0.2000
Control 0.0100..6.5535

Motor measured
VEL.07 RO RW The average data number raised to the 2nd power. 0...5 0
speed filter
Time for rated Stated with millisecond accuracy. Once the
VEL.08 speed stability RO RO stability has been reached, the integral term will 0...3.000 s 0.512
criterion apply.
Time for Approach
Stated with millisecond accuracy. Only operative
VEL.09 speed stability RO RO 0...3.000 s 0.512
when bit 1 of VEL.10 is set to 1.
criterion.
th
If 5 digit from right is set to 1, the moving
VEL.10 Speed Control RO RW 0, 10000 10000
window method will be used.

Speed control 0: Integrates according to stable speed.

VEL.11 RO RW 0,1 1
Integration 1: Always integrates.

0: Deactivated
1: Activated, speed integral in starting and
Position Control
POS.00 RW RW stopping 0..3 1
Mode
POS 2: Activated, speed integral only in stopping
Position 3: Activated, no speed integral
Control Start. Proportional It determines the value of the position control
POS.01 RW RW 0..4000 200
Constant constant proportional.
Stop. Proportional It determines the value of the position control
POS.02 RW RW 0..4000 200
Constant constant proportional.

Switching
PEC.00 RW RW Stated in KHz. 5.5 – 14.0 KHz 12.0 KHz
PEC frequency
Power PEC.01 Type of modulation RW RW Type of modulation 0:PWM Triangular 0
Electronic PEC.02 Downtimes H RO Value in microseconds. 00.500..03.000 µs 00.500 µs
Inverter Minimum pulse
PEC.03 H RO Value in microseconds. 00.000..03.000 µs 00.000 µs
width

ADJ.00 Ir read gain H RO This parameter specifies the r read gain. 0...65535 N/A

ADJ.01 Is read gain H RO This parameter specifies the s read gain. 0...65535 N/A
This parameter specifies the bus voltage read
ADJ.02 Vdc1 read gain H RO 0...65535 N/A
gain.
ADJ.03 A-channel zero H RO This parameter specifies A channel zero. 0..4095 N/A

ADJ.04 B-channel zero H RO This parameter specifies B-channel zero. 0..4095 N/A
Amplitude This parameter specifies the sinusoidal encoder’s
ADJ.05 H RO 0..65535 N/A
adjustment amplitude adjustment.
Absolute encoder’s This parameter must not be adjusted by hand. Its
ADJ.06 H RO 0..8191 N/A
coupling offset value will be given by the pole adjustment.
ADJ Sinusoidal
Adjustments, This parameter must not be adjusted by hand. Its
ADJ.07 encoder’s coupling H RO 0..4095 N/A
Measurements value will be given by the pole adjustment.
offset
absolute and
Sinusoidal
sinusoidal This parameter specifies the sinusoidal encoder’s
ADJ.08 encoder’s peak H RO 1024..2048 N/A
encoder. peak value.
value
This parameter is used to depict the sinusoidal
encoder being used. Digit 1: 0, 1

Digit 1 (from the right): Sinusoidal encoder Digit 2: 0, 1

direction. 1, reverses direction; 0, in the opposite
Sinusoidal encoder case.
ADJ.09 H RO Digit 3: 0, 1 N/A
characteristics
Digit 2 (from the right): Electrical angle direction.
1, reverses direction; 0, in the opposite case. Digit 4: 0

Digit 3 (from the right): Sinusoidal encoder auto Digit 5: 0

adjustment.

V0.01 – 04/2013 55 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

ACCESS
PAGE/ LEVEL
DEFAULT
PARAM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION OF VALUES RANGE
GROUP VALUE
N A
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
automatic rescue
mode with
batteries,
WITHOUT
detecting
favourable
direction.
Specifies the activation/deactivation and 2: Enabled
RES.00 Rescue Mode RW RW 0
configuration of the rescue mode. automatic rescue
mode with
batteries, WITH
detecting
favourable
direction.
3: Enabled rescue
mode with UPS
and without
batteries.
Speed in rescue
RES.01 RW RW Specifies the speed in rescue mode. 0.10..20.00 Hz 1.25 Hz
mode
Acceleration time in rescue mode stated in
RES.03 Acceleration time RW RW 0.30..10.00 s 6.00 s
RES seconds.
Rescue Only applies to rescue mode without batteries
(RES.00=3).
RES.04 Start speed RW RW Final speed of initial speed ramp stated in Hertz. 0.01..5.00 Hz 0.10 Hz
Equivalent to parameter ARR.01, but in rescue
mode.
Only applies to rescue mode without batteries
(RES.00=3).
Start acceleration
RES.05 RW RW Time of initial ramp stated in seconds. 0.10..5.00s 1.20 s
time
Equivalent to parameter ARR.01, but in rescue
mode.
Only applies to rescue mode without batteries
(RES.00=3).
With the aim of protecting and guaranteeing the
completion of the rescue, maximum output motor
RES.06 Rated Current RW RW 1.0..4.0 A 1.5 A
current is limited to twice the amount entered in
this parameter.
Equivalent to parameter DRI.07, but in rescue
mode.
Only applies to rescue mode without batteries
(RES.00=3).
Maximum speed of
If, during the completion of a rescue, it shifts to
RES.07 rescue by RW RW 0.10..20.00 Hz 5.00 Hz
rescue mode by unbalanced load, maximum
unbalanced load
speed will be limited. If 18% of this value is
exceeded, error 11 will occur.

Digit 1 (from the right): Pole adjustment

0: Deactivated
8: Activated. Offset in inverter.
9: Activated. Offset in encoder

Digit 2 (from the right): Adjustment of Sinusoidal

enc.
0: Deactivated
1: Adjustment of zeros, amplitude and peak
value. Digit 0: 0, 8, 9
2: Adjustment of direction
3: Adjustment of zeros, amplitude, peak value Digit 1: 0, 1, 2, 3,
and cycles per encoder turn. 4, 8, 9
4: Adjustment of directions and cycles per
Autotuning encoder turn.
TUN.00 RW RW 00000
activation 8: Adjustment of zeros, amplitude, peak value Digit 2: 0, 9
and directions.
TUN 9: Adjustment of zeros, amplitude, peak value, Digit 3: 0, 9
Autotuning cycles per encoder turn and directions.
Digit 4: 0
Digit 3 (from the right): Calculation of no. of
poles.
0: Deactivated
9: Activated

Digit 4 (from the right): RL calculation

0: Deactivated
9: Activated

A current sensor amplitude adjustment will be

executed.
Current sensors’
During this process, the machine brake is not 0: Deactivated
TUN.01 adjustment RW RW 0
released; therefore, it cannot be executed in MES 1: Activated
activation
or inspection mode and the car and counterweight
DO NOT NEED TO BE HUNG.

V0.01 – 04/2013 56 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

ACCESS
PAGE/ LEVEL
DEFAULT
PARAM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION OF VALUES RANGE
GROUP VALUE
N A
This parameter specifies whether the function
associated to A3 amendment is specified.

IMPORTANT NOTE: If the value of this

parameter is different from zero, that is to say, if
A3 amendment function is activated, either with
0: Deactivated
(1) or without (2) automatic reset, therefore:
1: Activated,
A3 amendment
A3A.00 RW RW automatic reset 1
activation 1) KRL1 function as speed limit relay is
A3A 2: Activated,
cancelled, thus leaving without effect some of
A3 manual reset
the parameters TR0.01 (speed limit relay
amendment
speed) or TR0.02 (speed limit logic).
function
2) Regardless of the value assigned to
parameter STC.08, input XC2/19 is set as
normally closed brake microswitch reading.
This parameter specifies the time during which
the brake microswitch signal will be analysed.
A3A.01 Sampling time RW RW 1.50..6.00 s 2.00s
This parameter will only be effective if A3A.00 has
a value different from zero (1 or 2).

TABLE 8.4

Parameter DRI.08 (motor model code) is a fictitious parameter. On entering the motor code, the values of the
parameters associated to the machine profile, as stated in the profile tables, are set. However, their values do not
remain.

For instance: We edit the parameter DRI.08 and enter the value 1101. It is the profile associated to the MAGO
125.2.240. In so doing, the console display will l show “Po” blinking, i.e. the entered value is right. If we refer to
the profile associated to this machine, we will find the following table:

V0.01 – 04/2013 57 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

PARAM VALUE DESCRIPTION

TR0.00 6.00 Inspection speed
TR0.03 10 Percentage, overspeed error detection
TR1.00 18.50 Rated speed
TR1.01 1.00 Approach speed
TR1.02 2.50 Acceleration time
TR1.03 1.50 Modification factor for acceleration curve
TR1.04 2.50 Deceleration time
TR1.05 1.00 Modification factor for Deceleration curve
TR2.00 7.00 Rated speed (2nd Bank)
TR2.01 0.70 Approach speed (2nd Bank)
ARR.00 1 Enabling of start ramp
ARR.01 0.15 Final speed of start ramp
ARR.02 1.40 Time of start ramp
STC.00 2.00 Pre-start brake delay
STC.01 1.00 Brake delay prior to stop
STC.02 2.00 Brake delay after stop
STC.08 2 Brake microswitch reading. Normally closed.
STC.09 0.50 Current drop time
DRI.03 14 Number of poles
DRI.04 2.9 Resistance (Ohms)
DRI.05 9.1 Machine time constant (ms)
DRI.06 26.3 Inductance (mH)
DRI.07 10.5 Rated current
INT.03 13 Id Current Control Proportional Constant
INT.04 18.2 Id Current Control Integral Time
INT.05 13 Iq Current Control Proportional Constant
INT.06 18.2 Iq Current Control Integral Constant
INT.09 2 Current Filter
UEL.00 20000 Speed Control Proportional Constant. Start.
UEL.01 20000 Speed Control Proportional Constant. Rated.
UEL.02 0.2000 Speed Control Integral Time. Rated.
UEL.03 20000 Speed Control Proportional Constant. Approach.
UEL.04 0.2000 Speed Control Integral Time. Approach.
UEL.05 0.2000 Speed Control Integral Time. Stop.
UEL.10 10000 Speed Reading Mode
POS.00 1 Mode/Activating Position Control
POS.01 250 Position Control at Start
POS.02 250 Position Control at Stop
PEC.00 14.0 Switching Frequency
RES.01 2.50 Speed in rescue mode
RES.03 6.00 Acceleration time
RES.04 0.10 Final Speed of Start Ramp in rescue mode
RES.05 1.20 Acceleration time of Start Ramp in rescue mode
RES.06 1.5 Rated current in rescue mode
RES.07 5.00 Maximum speed of rescue by unbalanced load in rescue mode

V0.01 – 04/2013 58 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

Each and every parameter in the table will be modified and the value assigned to each of them will be the one
entered in the profile table.

If value DRI.08 is re-edited, value 0 will be displayed again. If value 0 is set, no parameter will be modified. If a
valid code corresponding to the machine profile is entered, it will modify the values of the parameters in the
associated profile. If a number different from zero not corresponding to any machine code is entered, “P.Err” will
be displayed on the console (not valid value).

The following table displays the possible values for this parameter for synchronous machines (a code for each type
of motor) and the values associated to the above-mentioned parameters.

BRAND MODEL DESCRIPTION DRI.08

MP MaGO 075.2.240 375 Kg 2:1 1m/s 3.0 KW 1099

MP MaGO 100.2.240 v.B (*) 450 Kg 2:1 1m/s 3.4 KW 1100
MP MaGO 125.2.240 v.B (*) 630 Kg 2:1 1m/s 4.2 KW 1101
MP MaGO 150.2.240 750 Kg 2:1 1m/s 6.0 KW 1102
1000 Kg 2:1 1m/s 7.5 KW
MP MaGO 175.2.240 1103
10 HP P=1400 Kg
1000 Kg 2:1 1m/s 7.5 KW
MP MaGO 175.2.240 1104
15 HP P=1800 Kg
MP MaGO 200.2.240 v.B (*) 1125 Kg 2:1 1m/s 8.0 KW 1105
MP MaGO 200.2.240 v.A 1125 Kg 2:1 1m/s 8.0 KW 1106
MP MaGO 250.2.240 1250 Kg 2:1 1m/s 10.2 KW 1107

MP MaGO 150.1.240 375 Kg 1:1 1m/s 3.0 KW 1108

MP MAGO 175.1.240 450 Kg 1:1 1m/s 3.5 KW 1109
MP MaGO 200.1.240 480 Kg 1:1 1m/s 4.0 KW 1110
MP MAGO 225.1.240 525 Kg 1:1 1m/s 4.5 KW 1111
MP MAGO 275.1.240 630 Kg 1:1 1m/s 5.9 KW 1113

MP MaGO 175.1.320 300 Kg 1:1 1m/s 2.6 KW 1120

MP MaGO 200.1.320 375 Kg 1:1 1m/s 3.0 KW 1121
MP MaGO 225.1.320 450 Kg 1:1 1m/s 3.5 KW 1122
MP MaGO 250.1.320 525 Kg 1:1 1m/s 3.8 KW 1123
MP MaGO 275.1.320 630 Kg 1:1 1m/s 4.4 KW 1124

ZIEHL
ZETATOP SM225.40 1000 Kg 2:1 1m/s 11 KW 1202
ABEGG
ZIEHL
ZETATOP SM225.60B-20 800 Kg 1:1 1m/s 7 KW 1203
ABEGG

MP MaGO 200.2.240.16 1250 Kg 2:1 1.6m/s 12.77 KW 1301

MP MaGO 275.1.400 700 NM 1:1 1m/s 3.5 KW 1403

CEG MINI ACT 130 v.2 300 Kg 1.1 1m/s 2.6 KW 1500
CEG MINI ACT 170 v.2 450 Kg 1:1 1m/s 3.7 KW 1501

(*)The profiles of previous versions of these machines can be found in the SSP web site (ssp.macpuarsa.es)
through the links Software Versions|3VFMAC, in the section Related Info|Synchronous Machine Profiles.

In order to be granted the access to this website you must have been provided with a username and a password.
If not, send your request to the After Sales Department.

V0.01 – 04/2013 59 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

9. Control of the inverter

This chapter describes in detail the inverter signals involved in its control. These signals can be divided into two
large groups:

Voltage-free inputs enable the inverter to be operated by any type of control board. The connection
terminals are located in connector XC2 or XC10, depending on the type of control board. Furthermore,
3VFMAC-DSP 6P is equipped with a special additional input in connector XC3 for the rescue or emergency
signal.

Voltage-free outputs: The equipment includes 3 relays with outputs through voltage-free contacts. The
connection terminals are located in connector XC4. The function and sequence of these relays cannot be
modified by means of configuration.

Within each group of control inputs and outputs, some are optional and some are compulsory. When we describe
them, we will indicate for each one whether it is compulsory or optional. The signals marked with (*) must be
imperatively incorporated. The remaining ones are optional.

PICTURE 9.1

(*)The three LEDs of voltage-free outputs are located at this place. In addition to these three LEDs, in the upper
part, you can find the LED EM, associated to the activation signal input of the automatic rescue with batteries.

V0.01 – 04/2013 60 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

9.1. Inputs
If the control board operating the inverter is MicroBasic or a non-MP one, the used connection terminals will be
those of connector XC2.

If the control board operating the inverter is Via Serie, the used connection terminals will be those of connector
XC10.

Independently of the used connector (XC2 or XC10), the references of the connection terminals will be the same
ones.

The only input signal that is not located in connectors XC2/XC10 is the rescue or emergency signal (EM). Like for
the other signals, it is a voltage-free signal, so that for DSP rescue with 5 batteries the terminals 20 and 23 of the
connector XC3 can be used; but, in case of DSP rescue with 4 batteries (asynchronous) or DSP-UPS rescue
without batteries (synchronous) the terminals 21 and 23 of the same XC3 connector shall be used.

Let us remind that the state of the input signals can be monitored through the input LEDs, as shown in picture 9.1.
Those LEDs are silk-screen printed with a number that coincides with the ones of the terminals of the input
signals:

PICTURE 9.2

The monitoring LED of the rescue or emergency input signal (EM) is in a different bank of LEDs, close to the LEDs
of the output signal activation; it is silk-screen printed with EM.

9.1.1. Emergency stop (contactors’ reading)

Connector XC13, terminals 11 and 12. It is compulsory (*).

This signal informs the frequency inverter that the contactors K1 and K2 are activated. It analyses the signal when
activating the relay KRL2 (by activating the contactors). At the beginning of a service or during it, if the
EMERGENCY STOP signal disappears, the inverter will immediately cut off the energy supply, it will deactivate the
triac KRL2 of contactors, brake relay KRL3 and it will display the error 0E (uncontrolled opening of contactors).

This situation shall occur when any safety contact of the installation opens during a service (for instance: default
in door lock contact). When the error 0E appears, it is displayed for approximately 1 second and during this period
the inverter is inhibited (it does not accept any command input signal). After that time, it starts running normally
again.

9.1.2. Run

Connector XC2/XC10, terminal 13. It is compulsory (*).

This signal activation triggers the execution of a service, therefore causing the start-up sequence indicated in the
diagram of starting and stopping.

9.1.3. Rated speed / Approach speed

Connector XC2/XC10, terminal 14. It is compulsory (*).

This signal informs the inverter about which has to be the motor turn frequency:

Activated: RATED speed.

Deactivated: APPROACH speed.

By changing this signal, the frequency will gradually be modified (depending on the acceleration, deceleration
times and the S-curves), until reaching the frequency/speed target.

The rated speed is determined by the parameter TR1.00 value and the approach speed by the parameter TR1.01
value.

If the input signal of the speed 2nd bank is activated (refer to next section), the rated speed will be determined by
the parameter TR2.00 and the approach speed by the parameter TR2.01.

V0.01 – 04/2013 61 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

9.1.4. 2nd Speed Bank

Connector XC2/XC10, terminal 15. Optional.

This signal activation enables using a second group of RATED AND APPROACH speeds:

PARAMETERS
Terminal 15 RATED SPEED APPROACH SPEED
DEACTIVATED TR1.00 TR1.01
ACTIVATED TR2.00 TR2.01
TABLE 9.1

If you do not need to use this function, keep the terminal nr 15 unconnected.

9.1.5. Inspection speed

Connector XC2/XC10, terminal 16. Compulsory (*).

Its activation selects the motor turn frequency in inspection mode.

Connect to the terminal nr 16 a contact of the inspection switch or a contact of a relay activated by this switch.
The contact must be normally closed, i.e., open when the inspection mode is activated. Therefore, this signal is
interpreted by the inverter in the following way:

Activated: Control board in normal operation, NOT in inspection operation.

Deactivated: Control board in inspection operation.

The inspection speed is defined in the parameter TR0.00.

In inspection mode it is recommended to deactivate the contactors from the control board without any
delay (by opening the run contactors). This way, the lift will stop immediately as soon as you stop
pressing the upward or downward command, allowing quicker and more precise maintenance works.

In the installations supplied by MP, inspection operation is made this way. Therefore, whenever you
stop pressing the upward or downward command (in inspection), the error 0E will appear, as the contactors are
immediately deactivated from the control board.

9.1.6. 2nd Acceleration Bank

Connector XC2/XC10, terminal 17. Optional.

The acceleration and deceleration times define how long it takes to the frequency inverter spends to go from
frequency/speed zero to frequency/rated speed (acceleration) and from frequency/rated speed to
frequency/approach speed (deceleration).
The 2º bank of ACCELERATION / DECELERATION signal enables using two different groups of parameters to carry
out the acceleration and deceleration in the motor:

PARAMETERS
ACCELERATION TIME DECELERATION TIME
Terminal 17
MODIFICATION FACTOR MODIFICATION FACTOR
TR1.02 TR1.04
DEACTIVATED
TR1.03 TR1.05
TR2.02 TR2.04
ACTIVATED
TR2.03 TR2.05
TABLE 9.2

If you do not need to use this function, keep the terminal nr 17 unconnected.

V0.01 – 04/2013 62 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

9.1.7. Run direction

Connector XC2/XC10, terminal 18. Compulsory (*).

It allows selecting the motor turn direction without needing to use an additional contactor to carry out the up and
down movement of the lift.

To adjust the run direction, it is recommended to operate in inspection or MES mode. Press the upward or
downward button. On this point, we have to make the difference between asynchronous and synchronous motors:

ASYNCHRONOUS

When commissioning the lift, if you observe that the movement direction is reversed, exchange 2
phases of the power output to motor. Do not modify the UP / DOWN signal wiring, neither the phases
of the frequency inverter power.

SYNCHRONOUS

IMPORTANTE: With synchronous motors, when commissioning the lift, if you observe that the
movement direction is reversed, NEVER exchange the output phases to motor.

The exchange of the output phases to motor will cause an erratic functioning, a blocking or a
runaway of the machine.
To set the proper run direction:
1) Set the control board in inspection or MES mode.
2) Press the up (or down) button.

- If it runs down (or up), i.e., if the motion direction is the reverse of the
commanded one, modify the parameter CNF.05:

If CNF.05 = 1, set CNF.05 = 0

If CNF.05 = 0, set CNF.05 = 1
- Try again to press the up (or down) button.

9.1.8 Error reset/reading of brake microswitches/reading of overspeed governor interlocking

coil state (EN81+A3 amendment)

Connector XC2, terminal 19. Optional. This terminal is not available in the connector XC10.

In asynchronous motors, this terminal function is configured through the parameter A3A.00 as
following:

A3A.00 FUNCTION
0 ERROR RESET
READING OF OVERSPEED GOVERNOR INTERLOCKING COIL STATE
1
(EN81+A3 amendment). AUTOMATIC RESET.
READING OF OVERSPEED GOVERNOR INTERLOCKING COIL STATE
2
(EN81+A3 amendment). MANUAL RESET.

TABLE 9.3

V0.01 – 04/2013 63 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

In synchronous motors, this terminal function can be configured through the parameters A3A.00
and/or STC.08 as following:

A3A.00 STC.08 FUNCTION

0 ERROR RESET
READING OF BRAKE
0 1
MICROSWITCHES N/OPEN
READING OF BRAKE
2
MICROSWITCHES N/CLOSED
READING OF BRAKE
MICROSWITCHES N/CLOSED.
ANY
FUNCTION
1 (0, 1, 2)
EN81+AMENDEMENT A3
Ineffective
ACTIVATED WITH AUTOMATIC
RESET.
READING OF BRAKE
MICROSWITCHES N/CLOSED.
ANY
FUNCTION
2 (0, 1, 2)
EN81+AMENDEMENT A3
Ineffective
ACTIVATED WITH AUTOMATIC
RESET.
TABLE 9.4

From this table, we deduce that the value of STC.08 takes effect if and only if A3 amendment function is not
activated, i.e., if A3A.00 = 0. If this function is activated (A3A.00=1 or 2), the reading of brake microswitches will
be activated in normally closed mode, INDEPENDENTLY of the recorded value in STC.08.

Automatic reset means that the occurrence of an error associated to A3 amendment will NEVER leave the inverter
in permanent out of service.

On the contrary, the manual reset means that the occurrence of any error associated to A3 amendment will leave
the inverter in permanent out of service, so that, to reactivate it, the presence of maintenance staff is required.

The meaning of both terms applies to the EN-81+ A3 amendment function and it is the same for both
asynchronous and synchronous motors.

9.1.8.1. Error Reset Function

The frequency inverter can detect different error situations that cause the lift stop. When an error occurs,
the inverter requires a RESET to be done to go on operating after. There are four possible ways to apply a
RESET:

a) By turning off and on again the equipment.

b) By using the AUTORESET function (CNF.02, the digit on right). Automatically, the equipment
carries out a maximum number of RESET during a period (3 minutes).

c) By entering in PROGRAMMING mode and coming back to RUN mode.

d) By applying the ERROR RESET.

The activation of the ERROR RESET signal takes no effect when the inverter is giving energy. When the
equipment does not supply energy and the terminal nr 19 is activated:

a) The display shows the text RESET blinking as long as the signal applies.
b) If there was an error, it will be reset.
c) The moment the signal is not applied any more, the equipment will be ready to carry out a new
service.

If there was an error, it will be reset and the moment the signal is not applied any more, the equipment will
be ready to carry out a new service.

As long as the signal is activated, the inverter will not carry out any service, even if the RUN output remains
activated.

The activation of the ERROR RESET signal does not avoid that the AUTORESET function
records one unit more (on the counter of maximum number of RESET during a period of 3
minutes) when an error appears.

V0.01 – 04/2013 64 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

Do not make an usual use of the ERROR external RESET signal. The AUTORESET function
ensures that sporadic errors do not cause the lift permanent stop; however, in case of
repetitive occurrence of errors (that could lead the lift to critical situations), the
equipment stops operating.

9.1.8.2. Function reading of brake microswitches

(Synchronous machines only)

The synchronous machines are equipped with two brake discs. Each of them includes a microswitch to allow its
state monitoring. There are two possibilities:

Normally open: with deactivated brake (mechanically closed), open.

Normally closed: with deactivated brake (mechanically closed), closed.

As there is only one input, both brake microswitches must be wired together, in parallel or in series.

The MP machines are supplied with normally closed in series microswitches.

As said before, this signal is optional, even if its use is highly recommended.

IMPORTANT: If the parameter STC.08 is set to 0 and the parameter A3A.00 is set to 0 (ERROR RESET
function), we must disconnect the terminal 19 of the connector XC2. Otherwise, even if receiving the
RUN signal (terminal 13), the inverter will not start.

9.1.8.3. Reading of overspeed governor interlocking coil state (EN81 + A3)

(Asynchronous machines only)

To implement A3 amendment function on installations with asynchronous machines (geared), an overspeed

governor interlocking coil is used. When this device is inactivated, the overspeed governor is interlocked. When it
is activated, the overspeed governor is released.

This device is fully commanded by the inverter: the activation is carried out through the relay KRL1 (XC4, 32-33)
and its state reading is carried out through the microswitch included into the interlocking device and through the
input XC2/19:

- Activated input (led 19 on): interlocked overspeed governor.

- Deactivated input (led 19 off): released overspeed governor.

Let us suppose that the inverter is included in a controller provided with A3 amendment function. If the parameter
A3A.00 is set to 0, i.e., if A3 amendment function is disabled in the inverter, the input 19 function is ERROR
RESET. Therefore, the inverter will display the text “rESEt” blinking and even if receiving the RUN signal (terminal
13), the inverter will not start running.

9.1.9. Rescue signal (EM)

Connector XC3, terminals 20 and 23 or 21 and 23. Optional.

This voltage-free input proceeding from the control board is a special input. This signal activation causes that,
after being properly configured, the inverter enters a special operating mode: automatic rescue mode.

There are 3 automatic rescue modes, detailed in the following table:

AUTOMATIC RESCUE Terminals

MODE XC3

DSP Rescue 5 batteries 20-23 • •

DSP Rescue 4 batteries 21-23 •
UPS Rescue (without
batteries)
21-23 •
TABLE 9.5

V0.01 – 04/2013 65 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

At this moment, the DSP Rescue 4 batteries mode is the standard rescue mode for asynchronous machines and
the UPS Rescue (without batteries) mode is the rescue mode for synchronous machines. The reason why the DSP
Rescue 5 batteries mode (synchronous and asynchronous) remains is the compatibility with existing installations
where it is incorporated.

For the full description of the rescue or emergency special function, refer to Chapter 9, section 9.5. However, it is
important to highlight two things regarding the input signals:

1. During all the rescue process, the rescue signal will remain activated. If the input of the rescue signal is
deactivated for more than 3 seconds during the process, the inverter will interrupt the rescue operation.
If the signal is reactivated, it will start from the beginning.

2. In rescue mode, the only voltage-free input in the main board input connector (XC2/XC10) that 3VFMAC-
DSP 6P will take into consideration will be the RUN signal (#13), as its activation will determine the
beginning of the rescue process. The target speed and the direction will be determined by the inverter
itself according to the rescue mode (DSP 5 batteries, DSP 4 batteries or DSP-UPS), the load and the
parameters associated to the rescue module (group RES).

9.2. Voltage-free outputs

The equipment is equipped with 2 relays and one triac that offer outputs through voltage-free contacts. The
connection terminals are located in the connector XC4.

El state of the output signals can be monitored at the output LEDs, located as shown in the Picture 9.1. A zoom on
the area of the output LEDs will let us see what is shown on the following figure:

SILK-SCREEN
OUTPUT LEDS DESCRIPTION
PRINTING
EM Input of rescue signal
Relay of speed limit
SP Interlocking of overspeed governor
Monitor of activity
K Contactors’ output (triac)

BK Relay of brake activation

TABLE 9.6

9.2.1. Relay of speed limit/Interlocking of overspeed governor/Monitor of activity (KRL1)

Connector XC4, terminals 32 and 33. It is optional.

This output function depends on the inverter/motor type and on if the installation is provided with EN81+A3
Amendment, as reflected in the following table:

INVERTER TYPE
EN81 A3
amendment

YES Interlocking/Release
Inverter state monitoring
A3A.00 = 1, 2 Overspeed governor

NO
Relay of speed limit
A3A.00 = 0
TABLE 9.7

The KRL1 function selection is configured by means the set value in parameter A3A.00:

0: Relay of speed limit.

1: A3 Amendment function with automatic reset. The occurrence of an error associated to A3 amendment
will NEVER leave the inverter in permanent out of service.

2: A3 Amendment function with manual reset. The occurrence of any error associated to A3 amendment
will leave the inverter in permanent out of service, so that, to reactivate it, the presence of maintenance
staff is required.

The specific features of the function implementation associated to A3 amendment depend on the motor type:
interlocking/release of the overspeed governor for asynchronous machines or state monitoring of the inverter for
synchronous machines.

V0.01 – 04/2013 66 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

Let us suppose that the inverter is included in a controller provided with A3 Amendment function. If the parameter
A3A.00 is set to 0, i.e., if A3 Amendment function is disabled in the inverter, the input 19 function is ERROR
RESET. Therefore, the inverter will display the text “rESEt” blinking and even if receiving the RUN signal (terminal
13), the inverter will not start running.

9.2.1.1. Relay of speed limit

It enables informing the controller the electrical frequency output (open-loop control) or the actual speed of the
machine (closed-loop mode) is higher than the defined limit at the parameter TR0.01.

A switching of the relay of speed limit can be done when the value set in parameter TR0.01 has been exceeded
by:

a) The output frequency, if the equipment operates in open-loop control

b) The actual speed of the motor, if the equipment operates in closed-loop control

If the parameter is set to zero, the switching of relay of logic of contacts will never occur.

Depending on the set out logic in the parameter TR0.02, the relay will be operated in the following way:

a) Positive logic (TR0.02 = 1)

Lower value than TR0.01: open contact

Higher value than TR0.01: closed contact

b) Negative logic (TR0.02 = 0)

Lower value than TR0.01: closed contact

Higher value than TR0.01: open contact

Use this relay when the lift is provided with approach to floor with doors pre-opening. The inverter will inform on
the moment that the car speed is lower than a determined value (required by EN-81).

Example:
In a lift of 1.0 m/s in which we want to start the doors pre-opening when the speed is lower than 0.15 m/s, if 1
m/s corresponds to 50.00 Hz, at 0.15 m/s, the output frequency would correspond to (50.00*0.15) / 1.0 = 7.50
Hz. Therefore, the parameter TR0.03 value should be set to 7.50 Hz.

9.2.1.2. Overspeed governor Interlocking/Release

This function is available for those asynchronous inverters provided with A3 Amendment function activated.

With asynchronous machines (geared), the interlocking coil of the overspeed governor is used. When this device is
inactivated, the overspeed governor is interlocked. When it is activated, the overspeed governor is released.

This device is fully commanded by the inverter: the activation is carried out through the relay KRL1 and its state
reading is carried out through the microswitch included into the interlocking device and through the input XC2/19.

To check whether the inverter has activated or not KRL1, we will visualize the SP LED state (refer to table 9.6):

• On: Overspeed governor released.

• Off: Overspeed governor interlocked.
Therefore, when the lift is stopped, KRL1 is deactivated (SP LED off). When the lift is moving, KRL1 shall be
activated (SP LED on).

For further information, refer to chapter 5 about electrical installation.

9.2.1.3. Inverter state monitoring

This function is available for those asynchronous inverters provided with A3 Amendment function activated.

This voltage-free output is directly connected to a main board input: in Via Serie, the input KP2; in MicroBasic, the
input 4. Thus, the control board is informed at any time about the inverter state:

• KRL1 will be activated, SP LED on, if the inverter is ready to carry out a service.

• KRL1 will be deactivated, SP LED off, if the inverter is not ready to carry out a service. The inverter will
be “offline” if it is in permanent out of service due to an error, or it is in programming mode or it is off.

For further information, refer to chapter 5 about electrical installation.

V0.01 – 04/2013 67 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

9.2.2. Contactors’ control triac (KRL2) (*)

Connector XC4, terminals 34 and 35. It is compulsory.

The CONTACTORS’ CONTROL enables the inverter to carry out the optimum (in comfort terms) starting and
stopping sequence, by acting on the contactors.

The activation of the contactors is commanded by three groups of contacts placed in series:

a) Contacts of the safety chain.

b) Control from the control board (the run contactors).
c) Control from the frequency inverter through KRL2.

Refer to the diagrams at chapter 5 to check the required wiring of the contactors’ control, in order to obtain a
proper operation.

9.2.3. Relay of brake control (KRL3) (*)

Connector XC4, terminals 36 and 37. It is compulsory.

3VFMAC-DSP inverter carries out the mechanical brake control of the drive machine through the relay KRL3.

This output is used to activate an external relay or contactor of the brake.

A brake relay contact (or brake external contactor) will be placed in series with contacts of the contactors K1 and
K2. This brake control is the most usual, the most reliable and the cheapest.

The relay KRL3 makes possible an easy brake control that provides great comfort:

1. The relay KRL3 will command an external relay KRFR (brake relay).

Diagram 9.1

V0.01 – 04/2013 68 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

2. A contact of each contactor and a contact of KRFR will be placed in series.

Diagram 9.2

Depending on the brake type and/or the machine type, the power supply, the brake actuator device and
the advisability or not of using a filter (A*) and/or varistors can vary.

For further information, refer to chapter 5 about electrical installation.

9.3. Sequence

This section describes the logical sequence, in normal mode, for the activation of the input and output signals. For
the description of the DSP rescue function, refer to chapter 9, section 9.5 as it is a special operation mode.

The RUN signal (XC2/XC10-13) activation triggers the execution of a service, therefore causing the starting
sequence shown in starting and stopping diagram 9.1.

The RUN signal comes out from the control board and is responsible of its deactivation
(causing the stopping sequence) as soon as the level floor is reached. The control board
must wait until the inverter opens the contactors. This opening informs the control board
that now the service can be achieved.

The contactors’ control is carried out together from the control board and the inverter. The control board’s run
contactors and the inverter KRL2 are in series. Therefore, to avoid the activation of the contactors, both output
signals have to be activated in both the control board and the inverter. However, the activation of these signals
has to be carried out according to sequence shown in the here below table:

CONTACTORS’ CONTROL
STARTING SEQUENCE STOPPING SEQUENCE
The floor level is reached. The
1º Safety contacts closed
RUN signal is deactivated
The run contactors are The motor is electrically
2º activated. The RUN signal is stopped. KRL2 is deactivated
activated. and the contactors are open.
The frequency inverter
The run contactors are
3º activates KRL2 and closes the
deactivated.
contactors
4º The lift starts The service finishes

Where:
Action achieved by the control board
Action achieved by the inverter

TABLE 9.8

If the starting and stopping sequences are not carried out like explained or if, during a service, the safety chain or
the run contactors are eventually open, the error 0E will be generated and KRL2 (contactors) and KRL3 (brake)
will be deactivated. The inverter will remain disabled for approximately 1 s., the error will be reset and, then, the
equipment will be ready to operate again.

El error 0E is “” (AUTO RESET type) 5; i.e., even if it appears many times, it will never cause the inverter
permanent stop.

5
As we will see forward in chapter 10, there are two types of errors: “uncountable” (AUTO RESET type) and “countable” (NO
AUTORESET). The digit on the right of parameter CNF.02 determines the maximum number of errors for three minutes. Whenever
a “countable” error (NO AUTORESET) occurs, the counter increases the recording of errors. When the value of the digit on the
right of parameter CNF.02 is reached, the inverter remains out of service.

V0.01 – 04/2013 69 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

V0.01 – 04/2013 70 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

The brake control, unlike the contactors’ control, is exclusively carried out by the frequency inverter. During the
starting sequence KRL3 is activated (the brake opens) just after the contactors have been activated (after
activating KRL2). So as not to start the motor turn until the brake is full open, the target frequency/speed does
not begin to increase (acceleration ramp) until the time defined in parameter STC.00 is elapsed after the KRL3
acting.

During the stopping sequence, KRL3 is deactivated (therefore acting the mechanical brake) before deactivating the
contactors. Before deactivating KRL3, the motor will be electrically blocked and it will wait as long as the time
defined by the parameter STC.01 (brake delay before the stop).

The detailed and full execution of a service by the inverter is set out in previous page, schema 9.3: starting and
stopping, with all the involved inputs and outputs, as well as the associated parameters.

The function of position control and also the parameter STC.09 apply to synchronous motors
only. This parameter determines the current drop time after the brake closing. In this machine
type, as there is no gear, if the current is abruptly interrupted, a snapping noise occurs, because
of the little play of the brake.

The magnetizing time (3), indicated in the starting sequence, applies to asynchronous motors
ONLY. This motor type, unlike synchronous motors, does not have permanent magnets.
Therefore, the magnetic field must be created before the brake opening.

All the other involved parameters are common to both motor types and they are those ones concerning the two
speed banks (TR1, TR2), the starting and stopping (STC) and those concerning the adjustment of S-curves (RSN).

V0.01 – 04/2013 71 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

10. MANAGEMENT OF ERRORS

10.1. Error Reset
The equipment can detect different error situations. To return to normal operation mode, RESET the error.
Otherwise, the equipment will remain out of service.

There are several possible ways to carry out an error RESET:

a) By turning off and on again the equipment.

b) By pressing the red button P/R in the console.
c) By entering in SETUP mode and coming back to RUN mode.
d) By the AUTORESET function.
e) By running an external Reset.

The RESET of an error is possible only when the originating cause disappeared.

10.1.1 Autoreset

Function that automatically carries out a maximum number of RESETs in 3 minutes. During this period, if as many
errors as the maximum number set out (figure entered in parameter CNF.02 right digit) appear, the equipment
will remain out of service until an error RESET is carried out by any other mean.

Every time the equipment is turned off and on, or we enter or exit the PROGRAM mode, the internal counter of
number of errors within 3 minutes will switch to 0; i.e., as many errors as the maximum number set to parameter
CNF.02’s right digit value will be allowed in the next 3 minutes.

The AUTORESET function waits until the error cause disappears to generate (and count) the RESET.

10.1.2 External Reset of an Error (Terminal 19 connector XC2)

To have this function activated, let us remind that A3 Amendment function is to be deactivated and, for
synchronous motors, in addition to the function of reading of brake microswitches (refer to tables 9.3, 9.4).

An error RESET can be carried out through a voltage-free external contact, in terminal nº 19 of the connector XC2.

If this external RESET is applied together with the AUTORESET function, the AUTORESET internal counter will
never be increased.

If the AUTORESET function exceeds the maximum number of allowed errors, the external reset application will not
restore the AUTORESET counter to zero.

When an external reset is carried out, the display shows a blinking “rESEt” while it is being applied and the
equipment is disabled. This error RESET type is only accepted when no energy is given.

Normally, do not use the external ERROR RESET. An abusive use may degrade the installation if the error is
serious and occurs repeatedly. The AUTORESET function is secure and reliable.

10.1.3. Exceptions

The following groups of errors are exceptions to the above-mentioned:

NON-RESETTABLE Errors. This error group cannot be reset, neither with the AUTORESET function, nor with
EXTERNAL RESET.

These are the group of error of parameters (Err 0b, Err bx). When it appears for the first time, the equipment will
be left into out of service and it will not admit any kind of error RESET, neither AUTORESET nor EXTERNAL RESET.
Correct all the possible errors of parameters.

Errors with automatic AUTORESET. Regardless of parameter CNF.02 right digit value, the errors belonging to this
group are automatically reset. Therefore, as soon as the error cause disappears, it disappears too and the
AUTORESET function counter does not increase.

They can be referred as infinite or uncountable errors. When an error belonging to this group occurs, the inverter
will never be out of service.

The errors with automatic AUTORESET are: 0E (uncontrolled opening of contactors), 04 (low voltage), 07 (C1-C2
open), 18 (brake open when it should be closed), 19 (brake closed when it should be open), 5
(incremental/sinusoidal encoder error), 51 (error of absolute position reading).
For further information about these errors, refer to the section 10.3 of the present chapter.

Autotuning errors (Ax) and errors of sensors adjustment (dx). Regardless of parameter CNF.02 right digit value,
these are errors for which the maximum number of errors of the AUTORESET function is 1. Therefore, if only one
error appears, it will leave the inverter out of service.

V0.01 – 04/2013 72 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

Errors associated to A3 amendment. If A3 Amendment function is activated, i.e., if A3A ≠ 0, the configuration of
the behaviour of errors associated to A3 amendment will be determined by the value of parameter A3A.00:

• A3A.00 = 1: A3 amendment errors with AUTORESET (automatic “reset”).

• A3A.00 = 2: A3 amendment non-RESETTABLE errors (manual “reset”).

10.2. Actions for responding to errors

When an error appears, the equipment acts as follows:

. It immediately cuts off the power supply.

. It deactivates the brake relay (KRL3) and the contactors’ output (KRL2).
. It displays the error for 1 second6.

If the cause originating the error disappears, any RESET way will be able to restore the normal operation of the
equipment.

The error RESET will not be admitted until the cause has not disappeared.

The last 32 errors detected by the inverter can be directly displayed on the console (chapter 7) or by using the PC
application Management of Errors (chapter 13, section 13.2).

6
There is only one exception: Err 09, overtemperature error. This error remains for one minute, in order to make possible the
device cooling.

V0.01 – 04/2013 73 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

10.3. Description of the Errors

10.3.1. General errors

AUTOMATIC MOTOR
COD DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION
AUTORESET TYPE
Current sensor At least one of the current sensors has stopped Before every starting, the inverter checks the current sensors.
Error working properly.
When starting, if the error 01 appears, we will make the
following check:

The data viewings int r and int S while inverter is stopped

01 NO
The difference between both values might be greater than 50
and/or the absolute value of one of them greater than 100.

If this is the case, you should replace the inverter.

Anyway, if you have any questions or some questions to make,

contact MP for support.
Over-current A working situation where the motor instantly This error is always a side effect of very serious problems such
consumes a current above the maximum one as: Power cables incorrectly connected, faulty contactor,
supplied by the equipment has been detected. encoder with occasional failures, too sudden acceleration or
deceleration, machine wheels with high inertia ...

02 NO Find the failure. The repetitive occurrence of this failure may

cause the equipment’s destruction.

If you cannot solve it, please contact MACPUARSA and describe

the failure situation in detail.

High capacitors’ The maximum capacitors’ voltage allowed has 1. Check voltage applied to the equipment.
voltage been exceeded either in idle state or in
operation. EXCESSIVE VOLTAGE MAY DESTROY EQUIPMENT. IF 400 Vac
IS APPLIED TO THE 220Vac EQUIPMENT, IT WILL BE
COMPLETELY DESTROYED.

2. Check both the braking resistance connection and that it is

03 NO
in perfect condition (by measuring ohms between its
terminals).

When working in regenerative operation (as a generator),

capacitors’ voltage increases and voltage is restricted by
braking resistance. If the latter is not connected, Err 03 will be
displayed.

V0.01 – 04/2013 74 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

AUTOMATIC MOTOR
COD DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION
AUTORESET TYPE
Low capacitors’ The capacitors’ voltage is below the minimum In normal mode:
voltage accepted by the equipment, either in standby or
in operation. 1. Check voltage applied to the equipment. Insufficient voltage
may prevent the equipment from starting. Provisional
In rescue mode, low battery voltage. connection, heavy machinery near the installation, etc. are
possible causes for this error.

2. Like error 02, it may be due to third causes: Power cables

Minimum capacitor voltage levels: incorrectly connected, faulty contactor, encoder with occasional
failures, too sudden acceleration or deceleration, machine
400 Vac: 500 Vdc Stopped; 450 Vdc Running wheels with high inertia ...
230 Vac: 250 Vdc Stopped; 220 Vdc Running
In rescue mode with 4/5 batteries

Minimum battery voltage levels (400 / 230 Vac): 1. Make sure the batteries have been charging for at least 24
hours.
As a whole, 50 Vdc Stopped; 45 Vdc Running
2. Check overall voltage in all batteries and unit voltage of
04 YES
For each battery: 12/13 Vdc. If voltage drops each of them.
below 8 Vdc or raises above 16/17 Vdc, replace
the unit immediately. 3. Check wiring in inverter’s batteries.

4. Check that, in normal mode, batteries are charging and 60 V

CARBAT board/48 V CHARGER work normally.

In rescue mode with UPS (WITHOUT batteries)

1. Make sure the UPS have been charging for at least 24 hours.

2. Check that the continuous bus voltage (CE-, CE+), in rescue

mode is above 300 Vdc (220 rectified Vac).

3. Check the rescue system’s wiring.

4. Check that in, normal mode, UPS is ON and charging.

Motor blocked There are two main reasons:

SYNCHRONOUS Motors:
06 NO 1) The equipment has supplied maximum 1. Check that the brake activates and continues activated.
current for 6 seconds (synchronous and Please bear in mind that if the brake microswitch reading is
asynchronous). activated and the brake does not activate, error 19 will occur
before.

V0.01 – 04/2013 75 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

AUTOMATIC MOTOR
COD DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION
AUTORESET TYPE
2) Machine speed is under target speed or zero 2. If the car is overloaded and the lift is not correctly
(only for synchronous if TR0.03 ≠ 0). counterweighted, or if the car or counterweight locking has
occurred, the inverter cannot start the machine and this error
will be displayed.

3. Motor not connected or wrongly connected with, at least,

one phase missing.

4. Incorrect parameterising of the inverter. The most common

parameters which may cause this error are ENC.00 (pulses per
turn) and DRI.03 (number of machine poles).

5. Encoder offset not adjusted. Either the encoder has been

replaced or, due to an incorrect encoder to rotor coupling, it
has misadjusted. The encoder coupling must be
secured/checked and then run autotuning.

ASYNCHRONOUS Motors:

1. Operating in open-loop control. It may be due to

parameter INT.01 being excessively low and, on applying
an important load to the car, the lift does not start.

2. Operating in closed-loop control. It may have been

configured as closed-loop control and the encoder is not
connected or the inverter is not detecting its pulses. The
equipment will consider speed 0 and apply maximum
current.

3. Check that the brake activates correctly.

4. If the car is overloaded and the lift is not correctly

counterweighted, if the car or counterweight locking has
occurred, the inverter cannot start the machine and this
error will be displayed.

5. Incorrect parameterising of the inverter. The most common

parameters which may cause this error are ENC.00 (pulses per
turn) and DRI.03 (number of machine poles).

V0.01 – 04/2013 76 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

AUTOMATIC MOTOR
COD DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION
AUTORESET TYPE
Power terminals The terminals C1 and C2 must be shorted (with Refer to chapter 5, section 5.2: to know how to make the
C1 – C2 not power cable) as long as the inverter is supplying bridge between C1 - C2 and K1 and K2 contactors. Check the
07 NO connected energy. If it disappears instantly, the error is connections.
generated.
A contactor’s power contact may also be damaged.
Short circuit A short circuit has been detected in the motor Check phases U, V, W from the inverter’s output to the
output (U, V, W) or in the braking resistance. machine’s connection.
08 NO
Check that braking resistance is in perfect condition by
measuring resistance between its terminals.
Over- Over-temperature is due to a high rate working 1. Try to reduce the approach speed section and then operate
temperature situation, with long approach speed sections and in closed-loop (consumption is lower).
high room temperature.
2. The equipment’s fans may deteriorate (although very
This error, unlike the others, remains on display unlikely); please observe if, on the inverter supplying energy
09 NO for 1 minute. This is to cool down the inverter. (lift in motion), the fans remain stopped. If this is the case,
replace the equipment.

3. Check that the brake activates correctly.

Uncontrolled During a service execution, the EMERGENCY Normally, this error occurs when a contact in the safety chain
contactor STOP signal disappeared (terminal no.12); that is unexpectedly activated during a service execution.
opening is to say, contactors K1 and K2 were
0E YES
unexpectedly deactivated. In MACPUARSA controllers, in inspection operation, the series
suddenly activate when a movement is interrupted. This causes
error 0E to be displayed after each inspection movement.
Motor not There is no charge connected to the frequency Check power wiring from inverter’s output (U – V- W) to motor
connected inverter output. terminals.
10 NO
Check that the motor is in perfect condition (by measuring
resistance between phases).

V0.01 – 04/2013 77 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

AUTOMATIC MOTOR
COD DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION
AUTORESET TYPE
Overspeed The motor exceeds the maximum speed It can occur in faulty motors, when there is car overload, in
allowed. machines with inertia drive ...

Asynchronous motors: If the equipment is incorrectly parameterised, this error may

also occur. The most common parameters which may cause
Maximum speed allowed is 18% of the this error are ENC.00 (pulses per turn) and DRI.03 (number of
maximum speed (TR1.00). machine poles).

Synchronous motors: Two algorithms: In synchronous motors with parameter TR0.03 ≠ 0, this error
may occur in the following situations:
a) TR0.03 = 0. The same as in synchronous
motors. Maximum speed allowed is 18% of the 1) Autotuning has been run with the machine empty.
maximum speed (TR1.00). Furthermore, the inverter has been parameterised with the
11 NO
corresponding profile. Run the machine and, after a brief
vibration/rumble, error 11 (or 14) will occur.
b) TR0.03 ≠ 0. Maximum speed allowed is
TR0.03% of the target speed at each moment. The reason is the machine is empty and the profiles have been
It also detects overspeed in reverse. created for loaded machines. Once sure that the autotuning
process has been completed, place the load and test it.

2) The machine is loaded, a brief vibration/rumble is noticed

and error 11 (or 14) occurs. This is normally due to incorrect
parameterising of the speed control, filter and/or position
control. In this case, use the profile corresponding to this
machine.

Out of phase. Asynchronous only. Check power wiring from inverter’s output (U – V- W) to motor
Phase Not connected to motor. Unbalanced. Should terminals. Check that the motor is in perfect condition (by
12 NO unbalance either a wiring failure in any motor phase or measuring resistance between phases).
severe phase consumption unbalance occur, the
error will be displayed.

V0.01 – 04/2013 78 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

AUTOMATIC MOTOR
COD DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION
AUTORESET TYPE
Capacitor Capacitor failure or mains voltage low and/or 1. In inspection mode, if repeated and continued operations
failure. instable at the beginning of a service. are carried out, Err 13 may be displayed. Wait for 5 to 10
Instability in seconds before continuing.
capacitors’
voltage Due to contactor activation while power is flowing to the
machine, disturbance and instability in capacitor voltage occur.
Asynchronous:
2. This error, as occurs with error 02, may be due to third
NO causes: Power cables incorrectly connected, faulty contactor,
encoder with occasional failures, too sudden acceleration or
13 Synchronous: deceleration, machine wheels with high inertia ...

Inspection: 3. Check that the mains voltage is not too much low.
YES
Normal : NO 4. If the problem persists, replace the Electrolytic Capacitors.

VERY IMPORTANT: Before replacing the electrolytic capacitors,

please ENSURE that the HIGH VOLTAGE LED is totally OFF. If
not, there is a risk of electric discharge which may cause
death.

V0.01 – 04/2013 79 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

AUTOMATIC MOTOR
COD DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION
AUTORESET TYPE
Reverse Lift is moving on the opposite direction to the This error can occur in the following situations:
overspeed wanted one and faster than expected.
1) If the equipment parameterisation is wrong, this error can
appear. The most common parameters that may cause this
error are ENC.00 (pulses per revolution) and DRI.03 (poles
number of the machine).

2) An autotuning has been run when the machine was working

with no load hanging from the pulley. In addition, the inverter
has been parameterised with the right profile. We make the
machine work and, after a short vibration/rumbling, the
inverter issues error 11 (or 14).
14 NO
This is because the machine has no load hanging and the
profiles are designed for machines with load hanging. If we are
sure that the autotuning has finished successfully, we will hang
the load and make the test.

3) The machine has load hanging, after a short

vibration/rumbling, the error 14 (or 11) appears. Usually, this
is due to a wrong parameterisation of the speed control, the
filter and/or the position control. In this case, apply the right
profile for this machine.

Invalid The inverter has detected that contactors are If you get this error, do the following check:
contactor state closed when it is stopped.
1) Set the third digit from right of parameter CNF.02 to
1.

2) Unplug connector XC13 from the inverter.

16 NO 3) Make the lift run, either in normal mode or MES mode

or inspection mode.

If you don’t get any error, you should replace the inverter.

In any other case or if you have any question, contact MP for

support.

V0.01 – 04/2013 80 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

AUTOMATIC MOTOR
COD DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION
AUTORESET TYPE
Overvoltage The inverter has exceeded the voltage limit Possible causes:
(open loop only) applied to the motor and the current does not
reach the starting current (INT.01). 1) Current sensors in bad conditions.

If you have the current sensors checking disabled, you

can enable it by setting the 4th digit from right of
parameter CNF.02 to 0.

By doing so, the inverter will check the state of the

sensors at starting.

Also, while inverter is stopped, you can view the int r

and int s data. Their values must be between -50 and
+50 and the difference between them must be less
than 100.

2) Starting current too high (INT.01).

17 NO This parameter value must never exceed the rated

current indicated on the machine’s nameplate.

Usually, it must be between the 50% and 75% of the

rated current, depending on the installation.

3) Motor not connected.

Check there is continuity of phases from the inverter

up to the machine.

4) Motor stator resistance too high.

Measure the resistance between the machine phases.

Normally, it should not exceed 12 Ohms in induction
machines.

Contact MP for support.

V0.01 – 04/2013 81 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

AUTOMATIC MOTOR
COD DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION
AUTORESET TYPE
Brake This error occurs when the value of parameter Check the proper connection of terminals 11 (common) and 19
microswitch STC.08 is 1 or 2. of connector XC2.
Reading error.
Brake should be If it is an MP controller, check that the connector XMAQ is
closed and it is properly connected to the machine. The connection of the
18 YES opened. thermoprobe, the brake power supply and the reading of brake
microswitches are in this connector.

The activation/deactivation of brake microswitches can be

monitored at LED 19 (refer to chapter 3, section 3.3.1.1).

Brake This error occurs when the value of parameter Check the proper connection of terminals 11 (common) and 19
microswitch STC.08 is 1 or 2. of connector XC2.
Brake should be
opened and it is If it is an MP controller, check that the connector XMAQ is
YES closed. properly connected to the machine. The connection of the
19
thermoprobe, the brake power supply and the reading of brake
microswitches are in this connector.

The activation/deactivation of brake microswitches can be

monitored at LED 19 (refer to chapter 3, section 3.3.1.1).
Electromagnetic Inverter has detected electromagnetic Contact MP for support.
interferences interferences that could cause some kind of
20
Equipment malfunction.
21
22 Reset
When this error is detected, the inverter will
23
register and display the error and it will reboot
itself.
A3 amendment
error. The speed governor locking device should be
Interlocking locking the governor and the inverter interprets
Error of overspeed governor interlocking. that it is not.
error.
If A3A.00=1, Check that KRL1 output is deactivated and 19 input activated.
YES
30 Machine brake(s) not closed. Check that the governor incorporates the locking coil. If it
If A3A.00=2,
does, check its power supply.
NO

The machine brake should be deactivated and the inverter is

detecting it is activated.

Check that KRL3 output is deactivated and 19 input activated.

V0.01 – 04/2013 82 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

AUTOMATIC MOTOR
COD DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION
AUTORESET TYPE
A3 amendment Error of overspeed governor released The overspeed governor coil should be releasing the governor,
error. Release but the inverter understands it is interlocked.
If A3A.00=1,
YES error.
Check that KRL1 output is activated and 19 input is
31
If A3A.00=2, deactivated.
NO
If there is not any problem with the output or with the input,
the lift has probably been interlocked.
If A3A.00=1, A3 amendment Noise at brake state reading.
YES error. For A3A.01 seconds, the inverter analyses and determines the
32
If A3A.00=2, quality of the brake microswitch signal.
NO

TABLE 10.1

V0.01 – 04/2013 83 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

10.3.2. Parameterising Errors

Regarding to this kind of errors, compared to the table previously offered, in the following one the “AUTOMATIC AUTORESET” column has been deleted, because none of
parameterising errors is resettable, neither with the AUTORESET function, nor with EXTERNAL RESET, as already mentioned in section 10.1.3 of the present chapter.

COD MOTOR TYPE DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION

General An error in the equipment’s configuration Check and correct all the parameters until the error
parameterising error. data has been detected. disappears.

This error may occur if the equipment’s software has been

0b upgraded. If this is the case, contact MP.

Another possible cause of this error is the existence of

problems related to the inverter internal memory. Contact
MP for support.
Incorrect client code. Redundant access codes do not coincide.

CNF.08 and CNF.09 values (corresponding to access

b1
codes) must be the same.

Non-sinusoidal A synchronous motor cannot be controlled

Check parameter ENC.01. The fifth digit starting from the
b2 incremental encoder. using an industrial encoder.
left of the ENC.01 parameter must be 1.
Absolute encoder not A synchronous motor cannot be controlled Check parameter ENC.01. The fourth digit starting from
b3 configured. without an industrial encoder. the left of the ENC.01 parameter must be 2.
Invalid No. of pulses The number of pulses per encoder (ENC.00) For a synchronous motor, the number of pulses allowed
b4 per turn. turn is incorrect. per encoder turn is: 512, 1024, 2048, 4096.
Open-loop mode not A synchronous motor cannot be controlled
If the motor to be controlled is synchronous, the CNF.00
b5 allowed. in open-loop mode.
parameter value must be 1 (open-loop control).
Incorrect STC.04 Speeds specified in parameter STC.04 are Check parameter STC.04. Speeds specified in digits 2 and
b6 parameter. not correct. 3, starting from the left, must be below or equal to that
entered in digits 4 and 5.
Sliding window In order to use the specified encoder at the
algorithm not specified rate, the sliding window
b7 In parameter VEL.10, set the last digit on the left to 1.
enabled. measurement must be activated.

Invalid brake When you enable A3 Amendment

microswitch reading (A3A.00=1 or 2) you have to enable the
b8 Set STC.08 = 2.
setup (STC.08). brake monitoring using the n/closed
contacts of the switches (STC.08).

V0.01 – 04/2013 84 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

Incompatibility A3 Amendment function uses relay KRL1 as There are two possible cases:
between A3 output for the activation of overspeed
Amendment function governor the interlocking device. 1) If installation DOES HAVE A3 amendment,
and speed limit A3A.00=1 (automatic reset) or A3A.01=2
function. On the other hand, the speed limit function (manual reset) and TR0.01=0.00 (speed limit
uses the same KRL1 relay as output. disabled).
b9
Since both functions use the same output 2) If installation DOES NOT HAVE A3 amendment,
device, both functions become mutually A3A.00=0 (A3 amendment disabled) and the
exclusive. value of TR0.01 will contain the speed limit that
will determine the activation/deactivation of
relay KRL1 according to the logic set out by
parameter TR0.02.

10.3.3. Encoder Errors

AUTOMATIC MOTOR
COD DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION
AUTORESET TYPE
Incremental If the encoder is an industrial one (2 differential
encoder error. channels with TTL pulses, asynchronous machines, ASYNCHRONOUS MOTORS:
closed-loop control) and a noise has been detected INDUSTRIAL ENCODER:
in the reception of pulses.
1. Make sure the machine’s encoder is correctly
If the encoder is a sinusoidal one (2 differential connected to the controller’s connector (XENC):
channels 1Vpp, synchronous machines) and channel A (A+, A-), channel B (B+, B-) and power
incorrect values have been detected in one or both supply (+, -).
channels.
2. Check the encoder’s power supply.

3. Check that the encoder’s cable shield is properly

connected to ground.
05 YES
4. Check the connector XC6 proper connection:

Terminal 1 : Shield
Terminal 2 : A+
Terminal 3 : A-
Terminal 4 : B+
Terminal 5 : B-

5. Make sure that the terminals in connectors XENC

and XC6 make contact especially that they do not
“bite” the plastic.

SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS: SINUSOIDAL ENCODER

V0.01 – 04/2013 85 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

1. Make sure the machine’s encoder is

correctly connected to the controller’s
connector.

2. Make sure the control board is plugged in.

3. Check the encoder’s power supply.

4. Check that the encoder’s power supply negative

pole is connected to ground.

5. Check that connectors XC6 and XC8 are correctly

connected in the inverter as well as the terminals in
each of them:

XC6 : Terminals 41, 42

XC8 : Terminals 1 (shield), 6 and 7

Make sure the terminal cables make contact

especially that they do not “bite” the plastic.

6. Check the encoder’s adaptor cable electrical

continuity.

Rotor sliding Inverter has detected rotor movement while brake First of all, we have to be sure that the value of
is mechanically closed. parameter ENC.00 matches the pulses per revolution
of the encoder coupled to the machine.

Supposing so, although not common, in inspection or

MES mode, the inverter can issue this error if you
make travels in rapid succession, with short or no
time between them.

50 YES However, the occurrence of this error in normal

mode indicates that there is an anomaly in the
brakes of the machine.

This anomaly can be either of electrical type (long

time it takes the brake to close) or of mechanical
type. Check both.

Contact MP for support.

V0.01 – 04/2013 86 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

Absolute Before starting up and activating contactor’s 1. Make sure the machine’s encoder is correctly
position reading output, the inverter reads absolute position. If it is connected to the controller’s connector.
error. incorrect, this error is triggered.
2. Make sure the control board is plugged in.

3. Check the encoder’s power supply.

4. Check that the encoder’s power supply negative

pole is connected to ground.

5. Check that connectors XC5 and XC7 are correctly

51 YES
connected in the inverter as well as the terminals in
each of them:

XC5 (DATA): T1, T2

XC7 (CLOCK): T3, T4

Make sure the terminal cables make contact

especially that they do not “bite” the plastic.

6. Check the encoder’s adaptor cable electrical

continuity.
Communication Any type of error in inverter / absolute encoder 1. Make sure the machine’s encoder is correctly
error with communication, other than requesting absolute connected to the controller’s connector.
absolute position triggers this error.
encoder. 2. Make sure the control board is plugged in.

3 Check the encoder’s power supply.

4. Check that the encoder’s power supply negative

pole is connected to ground.

5. Check that connectors XC5 and XC7 are correctly

52 NO connected in the inverter as well as the terminals in
each of them:

XC5 (DATA): T1, T2

XC7 (CLOCK): T3, T4

Make sure the terminal cables make contact

especially that they do not “bite” the plastic..

6. Check the encoder’s adaptor cable electrical

continuity.

V0.01 – 04/2013 87 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

Incorrect type of When an autotuning is carried out, the type of 1. Write down the model, communication interface
encoder or inverter is checked and a test on the encoder’s and machine’s pulses per encoder turn.
53 encoder with an good condition is made. If the inverter is not the
57 NO
internal error. correct one or does not pass the test on its good 2. Contact MP and supply the information recorded.
condition, it will display an error code between 53
and 57, both included.
The number of When an autotuning is carried out, the number of Specify the number of pulses per encoder turn and
pulses per pulses per encoder turn is checked. If the number set ENC.00 parameter to this value.
encoder turn does not coincide with that stored in the ENC.00
58 NO
does not parameter, this error will be displayed. In case of doubt, contact MP.
coincide with
ENC.00.
TABLE 10.2

V0.01 – 04/2013 88 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

10.3.4. Autotuning Errors

No autotuning error has the automatic AUTORESET function. Thus, the automatic reset column has been
deleted. On the other hand, the autotuning process applies to synchronous motors only, so that the SYNC and
ASYNC columns have been deleted as well.

The following table displays the errors inherent in the autotuning process. During the execution of this
process, the inverter may display both general errors and encoder errors.

COD DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION

If the operator has not cancelled the
The command RUN is deactivated before autotuning process, monitor the RUN
A0 Interruption of the autotuning process
ending the autotuning process. signal by using LED 13 in LED bank 1
(refer to section 3.3.1.1, chapter 3).
1. Make sure the machine’s encoder is
correctly connected to the controller’s
connector.

2. Make sure the control board is plugged

in.

3. Check the encoder’s power supply.

On finishing the autotuning process, the 4. Check that the encoder’s power supply
Absolute position reading error. absolute position is read a second time. negative pole is connected to earth.
A1
If there is a problem during the reading,
the inverter will display the error. 5. Check that connectors XC5 and XC7
are correctly connected in the inverter as
well as the terminals in each of them:

XC5 (DATA): T1, T2

XC7 (CLOCK): T3, T4

6. Check the encoder’s adaptor cable

electrical continuity.

1. Check that the machine is completely

without load.
Equal initial and final absolute
A2 The machine’s pulley remains motionless. 2. Check that the brake opens properly.
positions.
3. Check that the encoder is correctly
coupled.
1. Write down the model, communication
interface and machine’s pulses per
Parameterising error in absolute Absolute encoder adjustment parameters encoder turn.
A3
encoder adjustment. not valid.
2. Contact MP and supply the information
recorded.
1. Check that the machine is completely
without load.

2. Check that the brake opens correctly.

3. Check that the encoder is correctly

coupled.

4. Make sure the machine’s encoder is

correctly connected to the controller’s
Sinusoidal encoder error. Incorrect or missing reading of one of the connector.
A4
two sinusoidal encoder channels.
5. Check that the encoder’s power supply
negative pole is connected to ground.

6. Check that connectors XC6 and XC8

are correctly connected in the inverter as
well as the terminals in each of them:

XC6: Terminals 41, 42

XC8: Terminals 1 (shield), 6 y 7

V0.01 – 04/2013 89 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

COD DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION

Make sure the terminal cables make
contact especially that they do not “bite”
the plastic.

7. Check the encoder’s adaptor cable

electrical continuity.
1. Write down the model, communication
interface and machine’s pulses per
Parameterising error in sinusoidal Sinusoidal encoder adjustment values not encoder turn.
A5
encoder adjustment. valid.
2. Contact MP and supply the information
recorded.
1. Check that the machine is completely
without load.

2. Check that the brake opens correctly.

3. Check that the encoder is correctly

coupled.

4. Make sure the machine’s encoder is

correctly connected to the controller’s
connector.

5. Check that the encoder’s power supply

negative pole is connected to ground.
The number of poles determined by the
A6 Incorrect number of poles.
autotuning process is not correct.
6. Check that connectors XC6 and XC8
are correctly connected in the inverter as
well as the terminals in each of them:

XC6: Terminals 41, 42

XC8: Terminals 1 (shield), 6 y 7

Make sure the terminal cables make

contact especially that they do not “bite”
the plastic.

7. Check the encoder’s adaptor cable

electrical continuity.

1. Write down the model, communication

interface and machine’s pulses per
Parameterising error in direction ADJ.09 parameter adjustment value is encoder turn.
A7
adjustment. not correct.
2. Contact MP and supply the information
recorded.
1. Check power wiring from inverter’s
output (U – V- W) to motor terminals.

2. Check that the motor is in perfect

Phase-resistance value determined by
condition by measuring resistance
A8 Error in resistance calculation. the inverter is not correct or is out of
between phases.
range.
3. Check current sensors by displaying
their values, in idle state, in digital units.

A9 Reserved

V0.01 – 04/2013 90 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

1. Check power wiring from inverter’s

output (U – V- W) to motor terminals.

2. Check that the motor is in perfect

Autotuning process duration has condition by measuring resistance
AA Time-out error.
exceeded two minutes. between phases.

3. Check current sensors by displaying

their values, in idle state, in digital units.

Incompatibility between autotuning An attempt of performing autotuning with

Autotuning must not be made with either
62 the rescue input signal activated has
process and rescue process. batteries voltage or UPS power supply.
been made.

TABLE 10.3

V0.01 – 04/2013 91 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

10.3.5. Sensor adjustment errors

No autotuning error has automatic AUTORESET; therefore, the automatic RESET column has been deleted.
Furthermore, the sensor adjustment process only applies to synchronous motors, therefore SYNC and
ASYNCH columns have also been eliminated.

The following table displays the errors inherent in the sensor adjustment process. During the execution of this
process, the inverter may display both general errors and encoder errors.

COD DESCRIPTION CAUSE SOLUTION

1. Check power wiring from inverter’s
output (U – V- W) to motor terminals.

2. Check that the motor is in perfect

Process duration has exceeded three condition by measuring resistance
d0 Time-out error
minutes. between phases.

3. Check current sensors by displaying

their values, in idle state, in digital units.

1. Check power wiring from inverter’s

output (U – V- W) to motor terminals.

2. Check that the motor is in perfect

condition by measuring resistance
between phases.
Maximum number of retry attempts The five retry attempts determined for
d1
exceeded adjustment have been exceeded.
3. Check current sensors by displaying
their values, in idle state, in digital units.

4. Make sure that the capacitors’ voltage

is stable.

If the operator has not cancelled the

Interruption of current sensor The command RUN is deactivated before autotuning process, monitor the RUN
d2
adjustment process completing the process. signal by using LED 13 in LED bank 1
(refer to section 3.3.1.1, chapter 3).

TABLE 10.4

V0.01 – 04/2013 92 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

11. AJDUSTMENT AND COMMISSIONING OF ASYNCHRONOUS INVERTERS (ASYNC)

11.1. Check of Connections
11.1.1. Inverter

a) Filter of contactors’ reading: Check that the connector 11 of the Wago terminal XC13 with
special pole is connected to A1 of contactor K1 or K2 and that the connector 12 is connected to A2
of K1 or K2.

PICTURE 11.1

b) Control board connection. We will have to take into account whether the control board is Via
Serie type, MicroBasic type or non-MP type.

• If the control board is VIA SERIE, the commands are given through the connector
with flat cable XC10 and the connector XC2 must have NO terminal connected.

Important points when checking the connection of the flat cable in connector XC10:
- DO NOT CONNECT IN XC11 OF THE INVERTER

- The flat cable has to be connected in the connector X3VF of the Via Serie board
and its red part has to be on the left side, according to its position in the controller
seen from the front.

- The flat cable has to be connected in XC10 of the inverter with its red part facing
upwards, according to its position in the controller seen from the front.

• If the control board is MICROBASIC or non-MP, the command orders will arrive to
the inverter through the voltage-free contacts of the connector XC2.

When replacing a 3P inverter by a 6P inverter, follow the instructions given in the

document called “3VFMAC-DSP replacement guide”.

V0.01 – 04/2013 93 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

c) Fuses F3/F4. Connector XC12.

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITH 5 BATRERIES AND
KG, KUPS CONTACTORS

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITH 4 BATRERIES AND KPW
CONTACTOR

TABLE 11.1

d) Bypass C2/C3.

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITH 5 BATRERIES AND
KG, KUPS CONTACTORS

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITH 4 BATRERIES AND KPW
CONTACTOR

TABLE 11.2

V0.01 – 04/2013 94 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
e) C1/-CE

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITH 5 BATRERIES AND
KG, KUPS CONTACTORS

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITH 4 BATRERIES AND KPW
CONTACTOR

TABLE 11.3

V0.01 – 04/2013 95 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

f) Connector XC3.

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITH 5 BATRERIES AND
KG, KUPS CONTACTORS

20 20
21 21
22 22
XC3
23 23
PCB
WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE 3VFMAC
WITH 4 BATRERIES AND KPW DSP
32
CONTACTOR 33
34 XC4
35 paso
36 especial
37

TABLE 11.4
11.1.2. Connection de VK2P weighing system (Optional)

The inverter allows the connection of the VK2P weighing system of MP, to avoid roll-back at
starting.

The female two-pole Wago connector of terminals T1-T2 of RS-485 of the VK2P will be connected to
the male Wago connector T1-T2 of the inverter (picture 11.2)

PICTURE 11.2
After connected, the LED RS-485 of the inverter will start blinking (picture 11.3)

PICTURE 11.3

V0.01 – 04/2013 96 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

11.1.3. Brake

The power supply voltage of asynchronous machines’ brake is usually 110 Vdc. For other voltages,
contact MP for support.

The machine brake is actuated by a rectifying board GRF RECT 01.

Terminals 1 and 8 of the brake relay (KRF) will be connected to the terminal 110 Vs and 0 Vs of
transformer secondary side
TM 0 F1F2V1V2
XMAQ

SCHEMA 11.1

11.1.4. Encoder

Check that the connector XC6 is properly and vertically connected in terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 of the
inverter male Wago XC6, as shown in picture 11.4. The terminals 6 and 7 of XC6 must remain
UNCONNECTED.

PICTURE 11.4

V0.01 – 04/2013 97 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

The encoder connection to the controller will be carried out through the six-pole female Wago connector
XENC, according to the specifications shown in the below schema table.

SCHEMA 11.2

It is very important to fix the encoder shield to the cabinet plate with a flange, as shown
in the below picture.

PICTURE 11.5

V0.01 – 04/2013 98 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

11.2. Initial Check of Parameters

Once the inverter connections have been checked, we will start verifying/checking the parameters
included in the following table:

Param Description E V Value

CNF.00 Type of control 0: Open-loop control (WITHOUT ENCODER)
X X
1 : Closed-loop control (WITH ENCODER)
ENC.00 Encoder pulses We will have to set ENC.00 to the number of pulses per
revolution of the encoder coupled to the motor.
X It is very important to be sure of this value. A wrong
value in this parameter may cause the car overspeed. It
has to be done at this moment in order to proceed with
the encoder check later on.
DRI.03 Number of machine poles We will have to set DRI.03 to the number of motor
poles. Usually, its value is 4 which is the default value
X for this parameter. However, if you want to be sure, we
recommend referring to the nameplate machine.
PEC.00 Switching frequency Where possible, due to the electrical noise, it will be set
X X
to 10.0 KHz.
PEC.01 Type of modulation X X We will set the type de modulation to 0 (triangular).

E: Open-loop
V: Closed-loop
TABLE 11.5

11.3. Check of encoder, current sensors and run direction

We will carry out the following actions:

1. Set the type of control in open-loop (CNF.00 = 0).

2. Set the control board in inspection mode.

3. Press the upwards (or downwards) button of the inspection command.

If it runs up (or down), i.e., if the movement direction is the reverse of the commanded one,
there is a problem machine phases’ order. In this situation, we will have to:

a) Switch off the inverter (for safety), and, in the mains connection cable from the machine to
the controller, make the exchange of U and V phases.

b) Switch on the inverter and retry to press upwards (or downwards) button.
If the inverter is going to run in open-loop (WITHOUT ENCODER), go to point 10 (end of the
process).

4. Activate the test mode (CNF.05 = 1).

5. With the inverter stopped, we can see:

· Or, tESt, blinking every two seconds. After it is seen three times, we determine that, for the
moment, everything is correct.

· Or, tSt01 blinking. Contact MP.

6. Make an upward travel and another one downward, as the encoder check is possible only when
the machine is in movement.

· If during both travels tSt02 does NOT appear, at any point, the encoder is correct. Go to point
8.

· If at some point during the execution of these travels, tSt02 appears, it is because there is a
problem with the encoder. Go to point 7.

7. Deactivate the test mode (CNF.05 = 0) and display the "Encod" value. The "Encod" viewing value
is a counter with a range from 0 to 65535. If the value is increasing, when it reaches 65535, it will
return to 0, and it will go on increasing. If the value is decreasing, when it reaches 0, it will return to
65535, and it will go on decreasing.

V0.01 – 04/2013 99 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
We have to ensure the following conditions in the following situations:

• Stopped. We will visualize the "Encod" value. We will touch the encoder connector; we
will smoothly pull the cables. The value should remain at 0. If not, the encoder
connection shall be checked.
• Upwards. The "UEL" visualisation must be a positive value and very close to "FrEC", the
"E5" visualisation must be also positive and close to "FrEC" and the value of "Encod"
counter shall be decreasing.
• Downwards. La "UEL" visualisation must be a negative value and its absolute value very
close to "FrEC", the "E5" visualisation must be also negative and its absolute value
close to "FrEC" and the value of "Encod" counter shall be increasing.

If the visualisations "UEL" and "E5" have similar values and opposite sign and “Encod”
behaviour is the reverse of the described one when moving upwards or downwards and,
when stopped, it remains to 0, we have to exchange C1+ by el C1-, in six-pole female Wago
connector XENC of the encoder, and repeat the test.
In any other case, there is a problem with the encoder. The most common problems
related to the encoder are:
- One or more cables of the encoder signal do not contact, because when inserting the
cable in the Wago connector, it "bites" the plastic sleeve instead of “biting” the cable.

- Confusion in the connection order of the cables in the connector.

- Absence of encoder supply. In this case, when moving, the value of "Encod"
visualisation remains to 0.

Once the required checks have been done, we will reactivate the test mode (CNF05 =
1) and return to point 5.

8. Deactivate the test mode (CNF.05 = 0).

9. ONLY if the lift is going to operate in closed-loop control (using the encoder), restore CNF.00=1.

10. End of the check.

11.4. Adjustment of INT.00 and INT.01

1. Set the control type in open-loop (CNF.00 = 0).

2. Determination of the starting current (INT.01).

This step applies only if the inverter is going to run in open-loop mode. If it going to run in closed-
loop mode, go to point 3.

These are the steps to be followed:

a) Carry out a downwards service without load from the highest floor.

If it is unable to start, we will slowly and gradually increase INT.01 until the starting is
achieved. Do not overdo.

After reaching this, proceed with next point.

b) Carry out a downwards service with load from the highest floor.

If it is unable to start, we will slowly and gradually increase INT.01 until the starting is
achieved. Do not overdo.

3. Determination of the no-load current (INT.00).

In open-loop and closed-loop.

Even if the inverter is going to run in open-loop, the parameter INT.00 has to be properly
adjusted to let the inverter carry out the proper unbalanced load.
The process to be followed is the following:

• Executing long services, we will make the lift operate without load in car.
• When it is moving at rated speed, read the "int d" magnitude.
• Make the reading both upwards and downwards. The obtained result in both cases will be
quite similar.
• Set INT.00 to the LOWER of the two readings.
4. ONLY if the lift is going to operate in closed-loop control (using the encoder), restore CNF.00=1.

V0.01 – 04/2013 100 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

11.5. Adjustment of rated speed (TR1.00)

According to this documentation, the parameters TR1.00 and TR2.00 are the rated
speeds/frequencies for speed banks 1 and 2, respectively.

Depending on the control type selected through parameter CNF.00 (0: open-loop; 1: closed-loop),
these data will be son interpreted like frequencies or speeds, respectively.

Let us suppose an inverter configured in closed-loop control, with TR1.00 = 50.00. We give the rated
speed command to it. It makes the acceleration curve properly, it reaches the rated speed and, after
1 or 2 seconds, it starts vibrating, vibrations that, depending on the case, can be very strong. Why
does it occur?

As already mentioned, if the inverter is configured in open-loop control (CNF.00 = 0), the value
stored in TR1.00 represents the target electrical frequency of output to motor and, if the inverter is
configured in closed-loop control (CNF.00 = 1), TR1.00 is the target mechanical frequency, which is
not the electrical frequency of output, due to the inherent sliding to asynchronous machines.

Therefore, if the inverter is configured in open-loop, the value we have to record in parameter
TR1.00 is the rated frequency in hertz shown in the machine’s nameplate.

If the inverter is configured in closed-loop, we have to calculate the following formula:

RPMxPoles No.
120

On the machine’s nameplate, the rated revolutions per minute (RPM) and the number of poles shall
be stated. With these data and applying the following formula, we obtain the maximum value to be
recorded in TR1.00 and TR2.00.

The formula considers the number of poles, not the pairs of poles.

For instance, let us suppose a machine with 4 poles 1350 rpm in its nameplate. The value to be
recorded in this parameter would be:

RPMxPoles No. 1350 x 4

= = 45.00
120 120

There is a formula to calculate TR1.00 which is normally used:

RPM
x50 Hz
1500

Two conditions are required for this formula to be valid:

1) The machine rated frequency must be 50Hz

2) The machine must necessarily have 4 poles.

Even if it is not usual, there are machines of 6 poles. In these cases, this formula cannot be used.

11.6. Adjustment of low speed (TR1.01)

The steps to be followed are:

- Initial value of TR1.01 (approach speed).

V0.01 – 04/2013 101 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

The initial value of TR1.01 can be taken from the following table:

Speed (m/s) TR1.01 (Hz)

0,5 7..8
0,63 6..7
0,8 5..6
1,0 4..5
1,6 3..4

TABLE 11.6

This table is based on experimental results. In most of the cases, with these
values, good results have been obtained. Therefore, we are going to use the table
to set a first value.

However, we can say that the approach speed is obtained on the basis of the
linear speed. This one is to be around 10-12 cm/s. For instance, a frequent case:
Leo Sassi machine of 1 m/s and regulation frequency of 45 Hz:

45 Hz 45 Hz
10 cm/s x = 0.10 m/s x = 4.5 Hz
1 m/s 1 m/s

If we apply this formula in all the other cases, taking 45/48 Hz as rated speed, we will see
that it is the rule to follow.

- Vibrations

When setting the values from the table, it may be that we obtain vibrations in approach. It
happens quite often in lifts of 1.6 m/s.

We will increase TR1.01 in 0,5 Hz increments until the vibration disappears.

11.7. Adjustment of S-curves

The speed is defined as the position change with respect to time - first derivative of position.

The acceleration is defined as the speed change with respect to time - first derivative of speed or
second derivative of position.

The jerk is defined as the acceleration change with respect to time - first derivative of acceleration.
Our sensitivity is associated to this magnitude, i.e., to the acceleration changes and it can cause an
unpleasant sensation to the lift car passengers when starting and stopping.

Therefore, in these points (starting and stopping), we have to assign the speed setpoints to the
motor in such a way to obtain smooth changes of acceleration. The speed profile obtained this way is
called S-curves.

In the following figure, we can see the profiles of speed, acceleration and jerk for a linear curve and
an S-curve.

V0.01 – 04/2013 102 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

FIGURE 11.1

3VFMAC-DSP 6P supports two types of S-curves: Standard and Sinusoidal.

Any of them can be selected through parameter RSN.00 setting:

• 0: Standard
• 2: Sinusoidal

11.7.1. Standard curves

Standard S-curves are exactly the same as the ones present in 3VFMAC1. We begin from a speed
linear profile and we smooth the speed slope changes by means of the constants RSN.01, RSN.02,
RSN.03, RSN.04.

o RSN.01, RSN.02: Beginning and End of Acceleration; from speed 0 to rated speed.
o RSN.03, RSN.04: Beginning and End of deceleration; from rated speed to approach speed.

V0.01 – 04/2013 103 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

FIGURE 11.2

The higher is the value set in parameters RSN.01-RSN.04, the higher is the gentleness in the
associated area.

IMPORTANT NOTE: When we use this type of curves, the acceleration time TR1.02 and
deceleration time TR1.04 are affected by constants RSN.01-RSN.04. We could say that the set
values in TR1.02 and TR1.04 could be the acceleration and deceleration times if parameters
RSN.01-RSN.04 were set to 1. As these parameters are being increased, the times of acceleration
and deceleration are being increased as well.

FIGURE 11.3

11.7.2. Sinusoidal curves

These curves are called sinusoidal because the acceleration and jerk profiles are sinusoidal.

A big difference with respect to standard curves, important to bear in mind, is that this type of
curves scrupulously observes the times of acceleration (TR1.02) and deceleration (TR1.04), using
exactly the time indicated by these parameters, neither more nor less.

Therefore, if the set values in these parameters are too low, it can happen that we obtain errors
like Err 04 (low voltage of capacitors), Err 02 (over-current) or Err 13 (instable voltage of
capacitors). To solve this problem, just increase TR1.02 and/or TR1.04.

The standard curves are also called partial S-curves, as we begin from a linear acceleration and we
modify, one by one, the areas of speed slope change by means of constants.

The sinusoidal S-curves are also called full S-curves, as the obtained speed curve corresponds to a
unique function that depends on the initial speed, final speed and acceleration or deceleration
time. It means that 3VFMAC-DSP 6P determines the full curve for these parameters.

There is just one issue more to be treated: modification factor for acceleration curve (TR1.03,
TR1.05). The modification factor is nothing more and nothing less than a "deformation" of the
curve, in such a way that:

• the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end
and vice versa, and
• the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the
end.

V0.01 – 04/2013 104 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

The value that does not "deform" the curve (neutral value) is 1. The most convenient is to smooth
the acceleration at low speeds. Therefore, the default value TR1.03 (modification factor for
acceleration) is 1.50.

11.7.3. Which curve type do we have to choose?

Whenever it is possible, the sinusoidal S-curve (default value): the obtained jerk is lower than
the resulting one from standard curves.

11.7.4. Adjustment process for standard curves in open-loop mode

1. Adjustment of the acceleration curve: TR1.02, RSN.01, RSN.02

The adjustment of the acceleration curve corresponding to the standard curves consists of the
adjustment of 3 parameters:

• TR1.02 (acceleration time)

• RSN.01 (constant of acceleration beginning)
• RSN.02 (constant of acceleration end)

These three parameters have to be simultaneously adjusted. Let us remind, as already

mentioned in section 11.7.1. Standard curves of this document that the acceleration final
time depends on these 3 parameters, because TR1.02 is affected by the constants RSN.01 and
RSN.02: the higher these constants, the gentler the beginning and the end of the acceleration
and the longer the final time invested.

The values set in these parameters will be a compromise between the required comfort during
the acceleration curve and the final time invested in the acceleration.

The default values for these parameters are TR1.02=2.50s, RSN.01=50, RSN.02=50.

2. Adjustment of the deceleration curve: TR1.04, RSN.03, RSN.04

The adjustment of the deceleration curve corresponding to the standard curves consists of the
adjustment of 3 parameters:

• TR1.04 (deceleration time)

• RSN.03 (constant of deceleration beginning)
• RSN.04 (constant of deceleration end)

These three parameters have to be simultaneously adjusted. Let us remind, as already

mentioned in section 11.7.1. Standard curves of this document that the acceleration final
time depends on these 3 parameters, because TR1.04 is affected by the constants RSN.03 and
RSN.04: the higher these constants, the gentler the beginning and the end of the deceleration
and the longer the final time invested.

Once the approach frequency is reached, it is important it remains stable for a time between 1
and 3 seconds.

To do this, we will use the viewing “FrEC” where an "E" must be displayed for more than 1
second and less than 3:

- If it is displayed for less than one second, we can:

• Or reduce the deceleration time (TR1.04). We have to do this carefully because a

too low value in this parameter can cause Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. We will do this
by decreasing 0.20 seconds at a time.
• Or slightly reduce RSN.03 without compromising the comfort at the deceleration
beginning, by using decreases of 20 units.
• Or slightly reduce RSN.04 without compromising the comfort at the deceleration
end, by using decreases of 20 units at a time.

V0.01 – 04/2013 105 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

- If it is displayed for more than three seconds, we can:

• Or reduce the approach frequency, until a minimum of 4.20 Hz.

• Or increase RSN.04
• Or increase RSN.03
• Or increase the deceleration time (TR1.04). We have to do this carefully because a
too low value in this parameter can cause Err 02, Err 04 o Err 13. We will do this
by decreasing 0.20 seconds at a time.

11.7.5. Adjustment process for standard curves in closed-loop mode

1. Adjustment of the acceleration curve: TR1.02, RSN.01, RSN.02

The adjustment of the deceleration curve corresponding to the standard curves consists of the
adjustment of 3 parameters:

• TR1.02 (acceleration time)

• RSN.01 (constant of acceleration beginning)
• RSN.02 (constant of acceleration end)

These three parameters have to be simultaneously adjusted. Let us remind, as already

mentioned in section 11.7.1. Standard curves of this document that the acceleration final
time depends on these 3 parameters, because TR1.02 is affected by the constants RSN.01 and
RSN.02: the higher these constants, the gentler the beginning and the end of the acceleration
and the longer the final time invested.

The values set in these parameters will be a compromise between the required comfort during
the acceleration curve and the final time invested in the acceleration.

The default values for these parameters are TR1.02=2.50 s, RSN.01=50, RSN.02=50.

2. Adjustment of the deceleration curve: TR1.04, RSN.03, RSN.04

The adjustment of the deceleration curve corresponding to the standard curves consists of the
adjustment of 3 parameters:

• TR1.04 (deceleration time)

• RSN.03 (constant of deceleration beginning)
• RSN.04 (constant of deceleration end)

These three parameters have to be simultaneously adjusted. Let us remind, as already

mentioned in section 11.7.1. Standard curves of this document that the acceleration final
time depends on these 3 parameters, because TR1.04 is affected by the constants RSN.03 and
RSN.04: the higher these constants, the gentler the beginning and the end of the deceleration
and the longer the final time invested.

Once the approach frequency is reached, it is important it remains stable for a time between 1
and 3 seconds.

To do this, we will use the viewing “FrEC” and, the 1st digit from left must display an "E" for
more than 1 second and less than 3:

- If it is displayed for less than one second, we can:

• Or reduce the deceleration time (TR1.04). We have to do this carefully because a

too low value in this parameter can cause Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. We will do
this by decreasing 0.20 seconds at a time.
• Or slightly reduce RSN.03 without compromising the comfort at the deceleration
beginning, by using decreases of 20 units.
• Or slightly reduce RSN.04 without compromising the comfort at the deceleration
end, by using decreases of 20 units at a time.
• Or increase the approach speed, by increases of 0.5 Hz at a time.

V0.01 – 04/2013 106 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

- If it is displayed for more than three seconds, we can:

• Or reduce the approach frequency, until a minimum of 4.20 Hz.

• Or increase RSN.04
• Or increase RSN.03
• Or increase the deceleration time (TR1.04).

11.7.6. Adjustment process for sinusoidal curves in open-loop mode

1. Adjustment of the acceleration time: TR1.02

As already mentioned in section 11.7.2. Sinusoidal curves, this type of curves scrupulously
observes the times of acceleration set in TR1.02.

It is not recommended to set values too low in these parameters are, because it may cause
errors like Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13.

We will configure this acceleration time according to the gentleness that we want to give during
the acceleration. The default value is 2.50 s.

2. Adjustment of the modification factor for acceleration: TR1.03

This parameter affects “only” the profile of the target frequency during the acceleration:

• the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end and
vice versa, and
• the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the end.

When we say that it affects only the frequency profile, we mean that it does not affect the
acceleration time: it does not increase or decrease it.

Its default value is 1.50.

3. Adjustment of the deceleration time: TR1.04

The sinusoidal curves scrupulously observe the times set in TR1.04. A too low value may cause
errors like Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13.

Once the approach frequency is reached, it is important it remains stable for a time between 1
and 3 seconds.

To do this, we will use the viewing “FrEC” where the approach frequency must be displayed for
more than 1 second and less than 3:

- If it is displayed for less than one second, we can:

• Or reduce the deceleration time (TR1.04). We have to do this carefully because a too
low value in this parameter can cause Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. We will do this by
decreasing 0.20 seconds at a time.
• Or increase the approach frequency, by increases of 0.5 Hz at a time.
• Or both.

- If it is displayed for more than three seconds, we can:

• Or reduce the approach frequency, until a minimum of 4.20 Hz.

• Or increase the deceleration time, by increases of (TR1.04) of 0,20 seconds, until
reaching the indicated range.

V0.01 – 04/2013 107 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

4. Adjustment of the modification factor for deceleration: TR1.05

This parameter affects “only” the profile of the target frequency during the deceleration:

• the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end
and vice versa, and
• the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the
end.

It affects only the frequency profile. It does not affect the deceleration time: it does not
increase or decrease it.

Its default value is 1.00.

11.7.7. Adjustment process for sinusoidal curves in closed-loop mode

1. Adjustment of the acceleration time: TR1.02

As already mentioned in section 11.7.2. “Sinusoidal curves”, this type of curves scrupulously
observes the acceleration time set in TR1.02.

It is not recommended to set too low values in these parameters are, because it may cause
errors like Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13.

We will configure this acceleration time according to the gentleness that we want to give during
the acceleration. The default value is 2.50 s.

2. Adjustment of the modification factor for acceleration: TR1.03

This parameter affects “only” the profile of the target speed during the acceleration:

• the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end
and vice versa, and
• the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the
end.

When we say that it affects only the speed profile, we mean that it does not affect the
acceleration time: it does not increase or decrease it.

Its default value is 1.50.

3. Adjustment of the deceleration time: TR1.04

The sinusoidal curves scrupulously observe the time set in TR1.04. A too low value may cause
errors like Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13.

Once the approach speed is reached, it is important it remains stable for a time between 1 and
3 seconds.

To do this, we will use the viewing “FrEC” and, the 1st digit from left must display an "E" for
more than 1 second and less than:

- If it is displayed for less than one second, we can:

• Or reduce the deceleration time (TR1.04). We have to do this carefully because a too
low value in this parameter can cause Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. We will do this by
decreasing 0.20 seconds at a time.
• Or increase the approach speed, by increases of 0.5 Hz at a time.
• Or both

V0.01 – 04/2013 108 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

- If it is displayed for more than three seconds, we will increase the deceleration time, by
increases of (TR1.04) of 0.20 seconds, until reaching the indicated range.

4. Adjustment of the modification factor for deceleration: TR1.05

This parameter affects “only” the profile of the target speed during the deceleration:

• the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end
and vice versa, and
• the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the
end.

When we say that it affects only the speed profile, we mean that it does not affect the
deceleration time: it does not increase or decrease it.

Its default value is 1.00.

11.8. Adjustment of levelling

11.8.1. Stopping time (RSN.05)

The parameter RSN.05 is the stopping time: i.e., how long it takes to the lift to get from the
approach speed to speed 0. Values with milliseconds accuracy can be introduced.

The stopping S-curve is ALWAYS sinusoidal type -with modification factor 1.00, independently of
the S-curve type selected (RSN.00 = 0 or RSN.00 = 2). The unique parameterisable datum of the
stopping curve is the time.

It has been designed like this because, as already mentioned in previous section, the sinusoidal
curve jerk is much lower than the standard curve one.

11.8.2. Load compensation (RSN.06)

The function of parameter RSN.06 is to compensate "somehow" the load during the stopping.

In open-loop operation, this "somehow" consists of setting out as stopping time a factor higher or
lower than RSN.05 and setting out as approach speed a factor higher or lower than TR1.01, factor
which is determined by the inverter according to the torque exerted by the motor.

In closed-loop operation, this "somehow" consists of increasing or decreasing the stopping time
according to the torque which is being exerted at that moment.

• The neutral value for this parameter is 100 which is also the default value. Neutral value
means that with this value the stopping time will be exactly the one set in RSN.05.
• The higher than 100, the lower the stopping time according to the load.
• The lower than 100, the higher the stopping time according to the load.

11.8.3. Load compensation and levelling adjustment

The aim of the levelling adjustment process is not the exact levelling with floor level; the real aim
is to achieve a uniform stopping point (always the same) independently of the load, either up or
down service.

Once this is achieved, the levelling magnets will be moved in order to make the lift stopping point
coincide with the floor level.

Hereafter, the sequence of the actions to be carried out in order to achieve the levelling
adjustment is explained. These actions must be made according to this sequence, because if the
order is modified, it will be very difficult to achieve a proper levelling of the lift.

The adjustment procedure is different whether the installation is going to operate in open-loop
(without encoder) or in closed-loop (with encoder).

V0.01 – 04/2013 109 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

11.8.3.1. Load compensation and levelling adjustment in open-loop (without encoder)

1. Load compensation (RSN.06):

If it is required, here are the steps to follow:

a. Set RSN.06 to a value between 130 and 140.

b. Choose a destination intermediate floor (D)

c. Choose a departure floor in such a way that:

- It is located above the destination floor D

- It is not the highest floor
- There are at least two levels until the destination floor D

d. Make a travel from the departure floor A until D, WITHOUT LOAD.

e. Make a travel from the departure floor A until D, WITH LOAD.

f. Analyse the obtained result for the runs carried out:

Gradually increase - if we fall short- or decrease - if we exceed- until achieving the

appropriate levelling.

In open-loop, you do not get a perfect levelling (whereas in closed-loop, you get it), so
that deviations of +/- 1 cm must be admitted.

If it is not achieved, slightly slow down the approach speed TR01.01, but never adjust with
lower values than 4.2 Hz.

Once RSN.06 or TR1.01 is modified, return to point 1.d.

2. Levelling in up direction and in down direction (Adjustment of RSN.05)

a. Choose a destination intermediate floor (D)

b. Choose a departure floor A in such a way that:

- It is located above the destination floor D

- It is not the highest floor
- There are at least two levels until the destination floor D

c. Choose a second departure floor B in such a way that:

- It is located bellow the destination floor D

- It is not the lowest floor
- There are at least two levels until the destination floor D

d. Make a travel from the upper departure floor A until D, WITHOUT LOAD.

e. Make a travel from the lower departure floor B until D, WITHOUT LOAD.

f. Analyse the obtained result for the runs carried out:

- In the downwards service (d), if we obtain a stopping point higher than the one
obtained after the upwards service (e), increase RSN.05 slightly and gradually, by
increases of 0.050 seconds (for example: from 0.800 to 0.850).

Once RSN.05 is modified, return to point d.

V0.01 – 04/2013 110 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
- In the downwards service (d), if we obtain a stopping point lower than the one
obtained after the upwards service (e), decrease RSN.05 slightly and gradually, by
decreases of 0,050 seconds (for example: from 0.800 to 0.750).

Once RSN.05 is modified, return to point d.

- If the levelling point coincides in both cases (d, e), proceed to relocate the level
magnets.

3. Relocation of level magnets

Previous adjustments enable to make the lift stop at the same point, with or without load,
and in up direction or in down direction.

Then, we just have to make that (already uniform) point coincide with the floor level. To do
so, duly move the magnets which determine the levelling point at each floor, and correct
the existing deviations at every stopping.

NOTE: If there is any case where the modification is higher than 5 cm, the points of
deceleration beginning (pulse magnets) will have to be modified in order to keep constant
the deceleration section and the approach section to floor.

Finally, we must check that the distance between the approach magnet and the stopping
magnet of the destination floor D selected at 3.a is the same at all the other levels.

11.8.3.2. Load compensation and levelling adjustment in closed-loop (with encoder)

1. Adjustment of parameter VEL.10, if required

If the machine makes a throaty noise when stopping, we must set the second digit - from right -
of parameter VEL.10 to 1.

This is to say, assuming that its value is the default one 01000, we will have to set it to the
value 01010.

This parameter can only be modified with the advanced access code.

2. Load compensation (RSN.06): Optional

Normally, when operating in closed-loop -with industrial encoder or with magnet encoder -, no
there is no need to modify this parameter, because in this mode the load is automatically
compensated.

If it is required, here are the steps to follow:

a. Choose a destination intermediate floor (D)

b. Choose a departure floor A in such a way that:

- It is located above the destination floor D

- It is not the highest floor (superior)
- There are at least two levels until the destination floor D

c. Make a travel from the upper departure floor A until D, WITHOUT LOAD.

e. Make a travel from the lower departure floor B until D, WITHOUT LOAD.

f. Analyse the obtained result for the runs carried out:

- If the levelling point is the same in both cases (c, d), proceed to next point (3).

- Otherwise, increase RSN.06 in increases of 5 units. With the inverter operating in closed
loop, never exceed 120.

V0.01 – 04/2013 111 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
Once modified, return to point 2.c.

3. Readjustment of TR1.01: Optional

The aim of the readjustment of TR1.01 is to make a first rough approximation of the
distance between the magnetic reader and the magnet, leaving RSN.05 for the fine
adjustment.

Thus, once adjusted, the value of the stopping time parameter RSN.05 would be neither too
high nor too low. In some cases, too high could cause problems in stopping with full load.
Too low could cause an abrupt stopping.

To carry out this adjustment phase, a person will get on the car roof to take the required
measurements. The steps to follow are:

a. Choose a destination intermediate floor (D)

b. Choose a departure floor A in such a way that:

- It is located above the destination floor D

- It is not the highest floor
- There are at least two levels until the destination floor

c. Choose a second departure floor B in such a way that:

- It is located bellow the destination floor D

- It is not the lowest floor
- There are at least two levels until the destination floor D

d. Make a travel from the upper departure floor A until D. Measure the distance from
the magnet beginning up to the place where the magnetic reader is, as shown in the
figure.

FIGURE 11.4

V0.01 – 04/2013 112 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

e. Make a travel from the lower departure floor B until D. Measure the distance from
the magnet beginning up to the place where the magnetic reader is, as shown in the
figure.

Lift running
upwards

Level Signal from

Magnetic Reader
(i.e. MAC325)

Stopping distance
in up direction

FIGURE 11.5

f. Analyse the obtained result for the runs carried out:

- If the obtained distance is higher than 5 cm, decrease TR1.01 in 0.5 Hz.

After decreasing it, if there are vibrations on approach, restore the last value
and proceed to next point (4).

Once the modification has been done, proceed to point d.

- If the obtained distance is lower than 4 cm, increase TR1.01 in 0.5 Hz.

Once the modification has been done, proceed to point d.

- If it is about 4 or 5 cm for both runs, proceed to next point (4).

4. Levelling in up direction and in down direction (Adjustment of RSN.05)

a. Choose a destination intermediate floor (D)

b. Choose a departure floor A in such a way that:

- It is located above the destination floor D

- It is not the highest floor
- There are at least two levels until the destination floor D

c. Choose a second departure floor B in such a way that:

- It is located bellow the destination floor D

- It is not the lowest floor
- There are at least two levels until the destination floor D

d. Make a travel from the upper departure floor A until D, WITHOUT LOAD.

e. Make a travel from the lower departure floor B until D, WITHOUT LOAD.

f. Analyse the obtained result for the runs carried out:

- In the downwards service (d), if we obtain a stopping point higher than the one
obtained after the upwards service (e), increase RSN.05 slightly and gradually, by
increases of 0.050 seconds (for example: from 0.800 to 0.850).

V0.01 – 04/2013 113 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
Once RSN.05 is modified, return to point d.

- In the downwards service (d), if we obtain a stopping point lower than the one
obtained after the upwards service (e), decrease RSN.05 slightly and gradually, by
decreases of 0,050 seconds (for example: from 0.800 to 0.750).

Once RSN.05 is modified, return to point d.

- If the levelling point coincides in both cases (d, e), proceed to relocate the level
magnets.

5. Relocation of level magnets

Previous adjustments enable to make the lift stop at the same point, with or without load,
and in up direction or in down direction.

Then, we just have to make that (already uniform) point coincide with the floor level. To
do so, duly move the magnets which determine the levelling point at each floor, and
correct the existing deviations at every stopping.

NOTE: If there is any case where the modification is higher than 5 cm, the points of
deceleration beginning (pulse magnets) will have to be modified in order to keep constant
the deceleration section and the approach section to floor.

Finally, we must check that the distance between the approach magnet and the stopping
magnet is the same at every single level.

11.9. Adjustment of short floors

11.9.1. What is a short floor?

The notion of "short floor" within the inverter context is different from the notion of "short floor"
within the control board context.

Here, we talk about "short floor" from the inverter point of view when the rated speed is not
achieved during a service. It may occur because:

• it is a particularly short floor, or

• during the service between adjacent floors, the rated speed is not achieved. This is the most
common case. It happens in those lifts working at 1.6 m/s or 1.0 m/s, with large
acceleration sections.

This circumstance can be appreciated in the value of the viewing "FrEC" which falls short of
reaching the rated speed.

11.9.2. Adjustment aim

When configuring a "short floor", the main aim is that the time elapsing at low speed is not
excessive, in such a way that the service would take longer than required.

In open-loop, to quantify this time, we will observe that the programmed approach frequency
(TR1.01) is kept in the viewing "FrEC" for 2 or 3 seconds. More than 3 seconds is considered
excessive.

In closed-loop, to quantify this time, we will observe that a fixed "E" on the first digit -from left- is
kept in the viewing "FrEC" for 2 or 3 seconds. More than 3 seconds is considered excessive.

11.9.3. How to adjust a short floor?

There are two parameters, both in group RSC (Short S-Ramp), to adjust short floors: RSC.00 and
RSC.01.

V0.01 – 04/2013 114 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

FIGURE 11.6

When the inverter meets the signal of approach frequency, it will make the following:

• It will go on with the frequency ramp a “little more”, i.e., it will go on increasing the
frequency a “little more”.

- For standard S-curves, this “little more” is automatically calculated by the inverter
according to the acceleration time and the cut off frequency, in the same way its
predecessor, el 3VFMAC1, did it.
- For sinusoidal S-curves, this “little more” is quantified by parameter RSC.01. By
default, it is set to a value of 50. The longer RSC.01, it will go on increasing the
frequency for longer and, therefore, the shorter approach time.

• After completion of the frequency ramp, it can keep the frequency reached for a certain time
which will be calculated from the RSC.00 parameter value:

RSC.00 is the time during which the final frequency of the ramp cut off is going to be kept if
the latter was half of the rated frequency. Thus, the higher the frequency at the end of the
cut off ramp, the shorter the extension time and vice versa, the lower this frequency, the
longer the extension time. Thus, the tendency is always to achieve the set objective: reduce
the time at low frequency. The formula is the following one:

TR1.00 x RSC.00
 CUT OFF FREC/SPEED 
 
 2 

For instance: let us suppose that TR1.00 = 50.00 Hz and RSC.00 = 1.000 s.

CUT OFF
Extension Time
FRECUENCY
12.5 Hz 2.000 s
25.0 Hz = TR1/2 1.000 s = RSC.00
37.5 Hz 0.667 s
50 Hz 0.500 s

TABLE 11.7

Parameter RSC.00 applies for both types of curves (sinusoidal and standard). Nevertheless,
when selecting Sinusoidal S-curves (RSN.00 = 2), it is usually set it to zero (RSC.00 =
0.000), because the adjustment of RSC.01 may normally be enough.

V0.01 – 04/2013 115 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

12. SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS

12.1. Checks of Connections
12.1.1. Inverter

a) Filter for contactors’ reading: Check that the connector 11 of the special pole Wago terminal
XC13 is connected to A1 of contactor K1 or K2 and that connector 12 is connected to A2 of K1 or
K2.

PICTURE 12.1

b) Control board connection. We will have to take into account if the control board is Via Serie,
MicroBasic or non-MP.

• If the control board is VIA SERIE, the commands are given through the connector
with flat cable XC10 and the connector XC2 must have NO terminal connected.

Important points when checking the connection of the flat cable in connector XC10:
- DO NOT CONNECT IN XC11 OF THE INVERTER

- The flat cable has to be connected in the connector X3VF of the Via Serie board
and its red part has to be on the left side, according to its position in the controller
seen from the front.

- The flat cable has to be connected in XC10 of the inverter with its red part facing
upwards, according to its position in the controller seen from the front.

• If the control board is MICROBASIC or non-MP, the command orders will arrive to
the inverter through the voltage-free contacts of the connector XC2.

When replacing a 3P inverter by a 6P inverter, follow the instructions given in the

document called “3VFMAC-DSP replacement guide”.

If the reading of brake microswitches is enabled (refer to section 12.1.2.2), it will come
through terminal 19 of connector XC2, for both Via Serie and MicroBasic. Therefore, these are
the two cases that can occur when the reading of brake microswitches is enabled:

• If the control board is Via Serie, the connector XC2 will only and
exclusively have terminals 11 and 19 wired and connected.
• If the control board is MICROBASIC or non-MP, all the terminals must
be wired, including, of course, terminal 19.

V0.01 – 04/2013 116 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

c) Fuses F3/F4. Connector XC12

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITH 5 BATTERIES AND
CONTACTORS KG, KUPS

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITHOUT BATTERIES (ONLY
UPS)

TABLE 12.1

d) Bypass C2/C3

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITH 5 BATTERIES AND
CONTACTORS KG, KUPS

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITHOUT BATTERIES (ONLY
UPS)

TABLE 12.2

V0.01 – 04/2013 117 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

e) C1/-CE

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITH 5 BATTERIES AND
CONTACTORS KG, KUPS

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITHOUT BATTERIES (ONLY
UPS)

TABLE 12.3

V0.01 – 04/2013 118 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

f) Connector XC3

WITHOUT RESCUE

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITH 5 BATTERIES AND
CONTACTORS KG, KUPS

WITH AUTOMATIC RESCUE

WITHOUT BATTERIES (ONLY
UPS)

TABLE 12.4

12.1.2. Brake

The brakes of synchronous machines are usually activated in two different ways:

• Powerbox or similar. It provides an activation voltage of 200 Vdc for a short period of time and a
holding voltage of 100 Vdc (schema 12.1).

• Standard rectifier RECT_01: activation and holding voltages are the same and it provides 200 Vdc
(schema 12.2).

In both cases, the power supply of the brake activation device will be 220 Vac.
Terminals 1 and 8 of the brake relay (KRF) must be connected to terminal 230 Vp and 0 Vp of the transformer
primary side.

V0.01 – 04/2013 119 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

CONTROL
BOARD ASCENSORES 4A
110Vs
K2 KRF 400 Vp 0 Vs
13 1
14 3
(1)
- ~ 3A
230 Vp
(1) K1 0 Vp
14 8
13 6
+ ~
(2) POWERBOX 5A
XC2/11 20 Vs
(2) 0 Vs
XC2/19 TIPO/TYPE:TRM
450 VA 50/60 Hz
NOT CONNECTED CLASE/CLASS T40/F

SCHEMA 12.1

CONTROL
BOARD ASCENSORES 4A
110Vs
K2 KRF 400 Vp 0 Vs
13 1
14 3
(1) - ~1 3A
230 Vp
(1) K1 0 Vp
14 8
6
13 + ~2
(2) RECT_01 5A
XC2/11 20 Vs
(2) 0 Vs
XC2/19 TIPO/TYPE:TRM
450 VA 50/60 Hz
NOT CONNECTED CLASE/CLASS T40/F

SCHEMA 12.2

The schemas show the references (1), associated to the brake-varistor filter, and (2), associated to the
reading of brake microswitches. These two issues will be developed in next sections.

12.1.2.1. Brake-varistor filter

Due to the electrical features of the brake activation circuit and by the very nature of the brake coil, a brake-
varistor filter is required, because of voltage peaks that occur when deactivating the brakes. Its function is to
ensure the electrical protection of the controller’s elements against these voltage peaks.

The filter MUST be connected to terminals (3) and (4) of the connector XMAQ, at the end connected to the
machine, NEVER at the end connected to the controller.

IMPORTANT

THE APPROPRIATE VARISTOR-FILTER IS COMPULSORY. OTHERWISE, IT CAN CAUSE THE DESTRUCTION OF

THE ELECTRICAL /ELECTRONIC ELEMENTS.

Should you have any doubt or need support, contact MP.

12.1.2.2. Brake microswitches

The reading of brake microswitches is optional, but highly recommended. If carried out, such a reading will be
done only through terminal 19 of connector XC2.

As already mentioned in section 12.1.1, if the reading of brake microswitches is enabled, it will be carried out
through terminal 19 of connector XC2, for both Via Serie and MicroBasic control boards. Therefore, these are
the two cases that can occur when the reading of brake microswitches is enabled:
• If the control board is Via Serie, the connector XC2 will only and exclusively have terminals 11
and 19 wired and connected.

• If the control board is MICROBASIC or non-MP, all the terminals must be wired, including, of
course, terminal 19.

V0.01 – 04/2013 120 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

The reading of brake microswitches can be monitored through the state of LED 19.
3VFMAC-DSP 6P can be configured in three different ways, depending on the value of parameter STC.08:
0: Reading of brake microswitches disabled. Function RESET ERROR of terminal 19.
1: Reading of brake microswitches with normally open logic.
2: Reading of brake microswitches with normally closed logic.

Synchronous machines are provided with two microswitches, one for each brake disc included in this type of
machines.
Depending on the model and/or the manufacturer, the brake microswitches can be wired in three different
ways:

1) Common signal + NC contact for both brake microswitches.

2) Common signal + NO contact for both brake microswitches.
3) Common signal + NC contact for one of the microswitches + NO contact for the other one.

As pointed out earlier, 3VFMAC-DSP 6P carries out the reading of brake microswitches via a single terminal.
Therefore, we will have to wire the microswitches both together, in series or in parallel with the required logic
according to which we will set the appropriate value in STC.08.

As shown in previous schemas 12.2 and 12.3, terminals 5 and 6 of controller’s connector XMAQ are directly
wired to terminals 11 and 12 of connector XC2, respectively.

IMPORTANT NOTE: If the inverter input is connected to the brake microswitches, we must be sure that
parameter SCT.08 is appropriately configured. If STC.08 = 0 and the reading is wired to terminal 19, it can
happen that the inverter never starts, even though receiving the RUN command. In this particular case,
everything would be solved by disconnecting terminal 19 of XC2.

12.1.3. Encoder

The encoder coupled to a synchronous machine is very different from the industrial encoder coupled to an
asynchronous machine. As a matter of fact, they are different devices: an absolute encoder a sinusoidal
encoder.

The absolute encoder provides to the inverter a fixed and determined position in one complete turn with a
resolution of 8192 points. The absolute position reading is based on a physical interface RS-485 through
connectors XC5 (DATA channel, terminals T1, T2) and XC7 (CLOCK, terminals T3, T4).

PICTURE 12.2

The supported protocol is Endat01, proprietary Heidenhain. Errors associated to the absolute encoder are
numbered as err 5x, i.e., 51, 51, etc.

The sinusoidal encoder consists of two sinusoidal signals 1V peak to peak displaced in 90º to one another. The
number of cycles per turn will be 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096 and the value will be stored in parameter ENC.00.

The A (A+, A-) channel of the sinusoidal encoder is connected to connector XC8, terminals 42 and 43. The
(B+, B-) channel is connected to connector XC6, terminals 6 and 7.

V0.01 – 04/2013 121 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

PICTURE 12.3

The sinusoidal encoder is checked at all times, both at idle state and running, and its associated error is err
05.

The encoder shield is connected to terminal 1 of connector XC6. In addition, it is very important to check that
the connection of the power source connector and the one of the adapter cable connector have the same
sign: +, red and -, black. Check that the negative pole of the power source is connected to ground, as shown
in the here below picture.

PICTURE 12.4

To connect the encoder to the inverter, an adapter cable is required. The encoder adapter cable provides the
connection interface between the machine encoder and the inverter.

V0.01 – 04/2013 122 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

PICTURE 12.5

The end cable of the machine encoder is a male connector DB15 which will be connected to the female DB15
of our adapter cable.

The female 3-poles connector “+/-“ will be connected to the power supply source of 5 Vdc. All the other
connectors will be connected to the inverter in the following way:

41, 42: 7-poles, to XC8

1(*), 6, 7: 7-poles, to XC6
T1, T2: 2-poles, to XC5
T3, T4: 2-poles, to XC7

(*) In the first synchronous controllers, the encoder shield was connected to terminal 1 of connector XC6. At
present, the shield connection to this terminal has been removed. Approximately 1 cm of the adapter cable
shield remains uncovered and it is fixed to the rear plate of the cabinet by means of screw/washer.

The adapter cable pinout is shown in the following table:

FEMALE
INVERTER
DB15
1 XC5/T2
2 XC5/T1
3 NC
4 POSITIVE (5V)
5 NEGATIVE (GND)
6 NC
7 XC8/41
8 NC
9 XC7/T3
10 XC7/T4
11 NC
12 XC6/6
13 XC6/7
14 XC8/42
15 NC
In the past, XC6/1
HOUSING At present, ground
(Rear plate of cabinet)

TABLE 12.5 FIGURE. 12.1

Note: As shown in the figure, the poles numbering of the DB15 female connector, seen from the front, starts
from right to left. Housing means the metal housing of the connector. NC means “Not Connected”.

V0.01 – 04/2013 123 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

12.2. Inverter adjustment

12.2.1. Control system description

The figure 12.2 shows, in a general way, the blocks that constitute the inverter control system for a
synchronous machine.

FIGURE 12.2

During the starting and stopping, the speed control reference will be set out by the position control.
In any other situation, the reference speed will be set out by the module of S-curves.

The position control configuration is carried out through the group POS parameters.

The module of S-curves generates constantly the reference speed, plotting out a speed curve based
on the TR1 group of parameters for the bank number 1 of speeds/acceleration and on the TR2 for the bank
number 2 of speeds/acceleration and on the parameter RSN.05 (stopping time).

We will have a reference current as output of the speed control. This current has to be filtered, in
order to eliminate the typical mechanical resonances of the machine and of the installation. The involved
parameters in the filter configuration are INT.09 and PEC.00.

Finally, there is a current control. This module output will be the result of the output voltages to the
motor in accordance with the reference current. This module parameterisation is one of the functions
automatically carried out during the autotuning process. The parameters associated to this module are
INT.03, INT.04, INT.05 and INT.06.

V0.01 – 04/2013 124 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

12.2.2. Process general overview

In next figure, the procedure is globally shown.

FIGURE 12.3

V0.01 – 04/2013 125 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

12.2.3. Sinusoidal encoder check

When switching on the inverter, after the starting process, if the inverter display shows err 05, we
will have to:

- Check that the main board is switched on.

- Press the red button (PR) of the inverter

- If the error persists, carry out following checks:

1) Check the encoder power supply (5 Vdc).

2) Check that the power supply negative terminal is connected to the ground.

3) Check the proper connection of terminals XC6 and XC8.

4) Check that the wires of the adapter cable going to connectors XC6 and XC8 do not
“bite” the plastic.

5) Check that the cable length going from the machine encoder to the adapter cable is
approximately 10 m.

6) Check the electrical continuity of the adapter cable (refer to table 12.5, figure 12.1).

After all these checks are done, press the red button (PR) of the inverter. However, if the
error 05 persists, contact MP for support.

12.2.4. Initial review of parameters

The initial review of parameters will help us to set out baseline values with which a great part of the
adjustment will already be done.

These are the cases that may occur:

1. If the machine is included in the machine table (refer to section 8.4), we will use parameter DRI.08
to set out the values associated to the machine.

2. If the machine is not included in the machine table but we have its associated profile, the
associated values will be set out by hand. These profiles can be consulted at ssp.macpuarsa.es.

3. If we know the parameters of another installation which is properly functioning with the same
machine model, we can use those installation parameters.

4. Otherwise, i.e., if the machine is not included in the machine table, we have neither its profile, nor
any other installation with the same machine model, we will have to carry out the autotuning
process (section 12.2.6).

12.2.5. Absolute encoder check

A. CHECK THAT THE ENCODER CABLE IS PROPERLY CONNECTED TO THE MACHINE ENCODER.

Some encoders are supplied with a cable of 5 to 10 m, ending in a male DB15.

Other encoders are provided with a cable of 10 cm, ending in a 12-poles M23 male connector. A
cable of 5 to 10 m M23, female at an end and male DB15 at the other end is connected to this
connector. In this case, the proper connection of 12-poles M23 male-female connectors must be
checked.

B. CHECK THE PROPER CONNECTION OF THE ADAPTER CABLE, ON THE ONE HAND, TO THE CABLE
COMING OUT FROM THE ENCODER (TERMINAL DB15) AND, ON THE OTHER HAND, TO THE
INVERTER TERMINALS (XC8, XC6, XC5 AND XC7); CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE AS WELL.

C. CHECK THAT THE MAIN BOARD IS SWITCHED ON.

The input voltage of the encoder power supply source comes from the main board. Therefore, if
the main board is switched off, the error of absolute or sinusoidal encoder will be displayed.

- If error 52 (or 51 at starting) occurs:

1) Check the proper connection of connectors XC5 and XC7 in the inverter.
2) Check that the Wago connectors do not “bite” the plastic.
3) Check the proper connection of the adapter cable to terminal DB15 of the encoder cable.

V0.01 – 04/2013 126 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
4) Check the electrical continuity of the adapter cable (refer to table 12.5, figure 12.1)

5) Check that the encoder supports the Endat protocol, as shown in the picture.

PICTURE 12.6

Press the red button (PR) of the inverter, twice in case of error 52, once in case of error 51. If
the error persists, contact MP.
- If error 58 occurs, there is discrepancy between the number of encoder turns and the inverter
parameterisation. Contact MP Staff.

- If an error between 53 and 57 occurs, the encoder is not right, maybe because internal errors
are recorded or maybe because it is not the appropriate type. However, contact MP Staff.

12.2.6. Autotuning

The autotuning process applies only to synchronous motors. The fundamental premise in order
to run the autotuning process is that it must be carried out with no load hanging from the
machine pulley. Therefore, the process execution requires the car and the counterweight to be
hanged, and the cables removed from the pulley.

VERY IMPORTANT
THE AUTOTUNING PROCESS’ EXECUTION IS MANDATORY IF AT LEAST ONE OF THESE
TWO CONDITIONS IS MET:

1) THE MACHINE PROFILE IS NOT AVAILABLE.

2) IF THE ENCODER COUPLING HAS BEEN SOMEHOW MODIFIED.

Autotuning not only carries out the pole adjustment or zero adjustment. All the performed adjustments during
the process are:

1. Pole adjustment or zero adjustment.

2. Configuration of the current control.
3. Determination of the motor equivalent circuit.
4. Adjustment values of the sinusoidal encoder.
5. Determination of the number of poles.
6. Determination of the number of pulses per encoder turn.
7. Adjustment of motor direction/phases. The “Adjustment of motor direction/phases” involves
“reconciling” the absolute encoder direction, the sinusoidal encoder and the phase connection
order. Therefore, during the inverter installation, if the phase order is changed or if there were
any change in the sinusoidal channels A and/or B, the autotuning process would detect the
change and carry out the required adjustments.

Each group of these adjustments involves setting out the values of the parameters associated to each of
them, as reflected in the following table:

V0.01 – 04/2013 127 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

FUNCTION PARAM DESCRIPTION

Pole adjustment or zero ADJ.06 Absolute encoder’s coupling offset
adjustment ADJ.07 Sinusoidal encoder’s coupling offset
Configuration of the INT.03 Id Current Control
current control Proportional Constant
INT.04 Id Current Control
Integral Time
INT.05 Id Current Control
Proportional Constant
INT.06 Iq Current Control
Integral Constant
Determination of the motor DRI.04 Resistance
equivalent circuit (*) DRI.05 Time Constant
DRI.06 Inductance
Adjustment values of the ADJ.03 A-channel zero
sinusoidal encoder ADJ.04 B-channel zero
ADJ.05 Amplitude adjustment
ADJ.08 Sinusoidal encoder’s peak value
Determination of the DRI.03 Motor number of poles. NOT THE NUMBER OF POLE
number of poles PAIRS

Determination of the ENC.00 Number of pulses per encoder turn

number of pulses per
encoder turn
Adjustment of motor ADJ.09[1] This parameter is used to depict the sinusoidal encoder
direction/phases ADJ.09[2] being used.
Digit 1 (from the right): Sinusoidal encoder direction.
1: reverses direction; 0: in the opposite case.
Digit 2 (from the right): Electrical angle direction. 1:
reverses direction; 0: in the opposite case.
TABLE 12.6

In short, the autotuning process' execution generates values of parameters. Therefore, an inverter
replacement does not involve the autotuning execution but the value migration of a group of parameters.

Let us suppose that in an installation we replace the inverter by another one supplied from our Servicenter.
Let us suppose the most common case: motor phases connected in the right order and the encoder channels
as well.

In this case, by means of the application MPConfig (reading/writing of parameters), we will read the
parameters of the “old” inverter and we will write them on the “new” one. Doing so, the new inverter is now
ready to operate.

Another way to do so would be to record the machine profile by setting its appropriate code in the parameter
DRI.08 (refer to section 8.4).

The values of parameters DRI.04, DRI.05 and DRI.06 will not be modified. But these parameters ARE JUST
FOR INFORMATION and do not have any effect on the machine control. Their values will only be modified as a
consequence of the autotuning process' execution.

V0.01 – 04/2013 128 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

12.2.6.1. Parameters before autotuning

From the machine’s nameplate data, we have to set a series of parameters BEFORE the autotuning
process' execution, as shown in the next figure.

(*) The parameters relating to the speeds can be deduced from the rated frequency (Fn) or from the RPMs
and the number of poles.

(**)If the absolute encoder does not support Endat01 and/or the incremental encoder does not consist of
two 1Vpp sinusoidal analogue channels, contact MP.

FIGURE 12.4

DRI.07

The DRI.07 is directly set to the machine rated current (In) value.

V0.01 – 04/2013 129 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

TR1, TR2

The parameters associated to the speeds can be obtained from the rated frequency datum of
the machine (Fn). If this datum is not available, from the number of poles and the RPMs, the rated
frequency (Fn) would be inferred by using the following formula:

RPMxPolesNo.
Fn =
120

The parameters associated to speed according to the rated frequency (Fn) are related in the following
table:

PARAM DESCRIPTION VALUE

TR1.00 Rated speed The maximum value to be set in this
Bank 1 parameter will be Fn.

NEVER EXCEED THIS VALUE.

TR1.01 Slow speed As initial value, 10%Fn
Bank 1
TR2.00 Rated speed The maximum value to be set in this
Bank 2 parameter will be Fn.

NEVER EXCEED THIS VALUE.

TR2.01 Slow speed As initial value, 10%Fn
Bank 2
TR0.03 Inspection speed As initial value, 30%Fn

TABLE 12.7

IMPORTANT NOTE:

UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, NONE OF THE VALUES ASSOCIATED TO SPEED MUST

EXCEED THE RATED FREQUENCY.

ENC.01

Finally, parameter ENC.01 must be set to 21, which means absolute encoder that supports Endat01
protocol and sinusoidal incremental encoder with signals of 1Vpp.

12.2.6.2. Process execution

The execution and characterisation of the autotuning process is carried out through parameter TUN.00.
To modify/execute this parameter, there is no need to enter with advanced code in SETUP mode.

To command the autotuning process' execution, this parameter has to be set to the value 09999.

After the process completion and as a result, if no error occurred over the course, we will set the
values of a parameter group due to the adjustment and, in addition, the parameter TUN.00 itself will be set to
zero.

If any error occurs and/or the process is somehow interrupted, NO parameter will be modified.

The modified parameters as a result of autotuning (TUN00=09999) are the ones related in table 12.6.

Let us remind, as mentioned in previous section, that the autotuning process' execution requires no-
load hangs from the machine, the car and the counterweight are hanged, and the cables are REMOVED from
the machine pulley.

V0.01 – 04/2013 130 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

The autotuning execution consists of the following steps:

* STEP 1: Set the control board in inspection or MES mode.

* STEP 2: Check that the value of parameter DRI.07 corresponds to the machine rated current. The
rated current value must be included on the machine’s nameplate.

IMPORTANT NOTE: An erroneous value in this parameter may cause the machine
deterioration. If this value is unknown or not available, the autotuning must not be carried
out.

* STEP 3: Check of speeds. This is basic for the machine proper functioning after the autotuning
execution.

TR1.00: Rated frequency. This datum can also be found on the machine nameplate.

TR1.01: Approach frequency. As an initial value, set it to 10% of the rated frequency
(TR1.00).

TR0.00: Inspection speed. As an initial value, set it to 30% of the rated frequency (TR1.00).

* STEP 4: Autotuning activation: Set TUN.00 = 09999.

* STEP 5: Exit the SETUP mode.

* STEP 6: The console must display, blinking and alternately:

S t A r t t u n i n

* STEP 7: Keep pressing the up or down button of the rescue command or the inspection box. Along
the process, the following message will appear, blinking:

t U n X X
where XX represents the percentage of the completed process.

The process will take between 30 and 45 seconds, during which time the machine is, first, idle and
then moves from left to right and vice versa.

* STEP 8: If the process is completed without errors, the console will display, blinking:

S A V i n
This is the moment when the parameter values obtained from the autotuning process are being
recorded.

IMPORTANT: ON THIS POINT, WE MUST KEEP ON PRESSING THE UP OR DOWN BUTTON.

* STEP 9: At the end, the console will display, blinking and alternately:

t U n i n E n d

IMPORTANT: THIS IS THE MOMENT, NEVER BEFORE, WHEN WE CAN STOP PRESSING THE
UP OR DOWN BUTTON, AS THE PROCESS HAS BEEN COMPLETED.

* STEP 10: Stop pressing the up or down button.

* STEP 11: Additional actions. Process end.

If the process has been completed without errors, the parameter TUN.00 will be automatically set to
zero by the inverter. Therefore, the inverter would stop to be in autotuning mode and we could proceed to the
next point.

V0.01 – 04/2013 131 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
If during the process execution an error occurs, this error will appear and it will leave the inverter in
permanent out of service and ABSOLUTELY NO parameter will be modified, even TUN.00 which is set to the
value 09999. We must determinate the error cause, solve it and carry out once more this process from the
beginning.

Errors associated to the autotuning process are related in section 10.3.4. Autotuning errors of the
present manual.

12.2.7. Adjustment of speed control and current filter

IMPORTANT NOTE:

Before proceeding with the adjustment of the speed control and the current filter, we must
be 100% sure that the previous autotuning process, if it has been carried out, is
successfully completed and without any error.

Once we are sure about this, we must carry out the following protocol:

1) Ensure that parameter TR0.03 = 10.

2) Hang the car and the counterweight. It makes no sense to adjust the speed and position controls at
this point, as these settings change from being with no load or with load.

3) Check the initial values of the parameters associated to the speed control and the current filter.

There are three possible cases:

a) The inverter is pre-parameterised. These are cases in which the inverter is part of a
complete lift order and the autotuning execution is not indicated as compulsory (TUN.00
= 0). Another possibility is that the inverter has been specifically supplied for this
installation, as a result of a claim inquiry.

In this case, proceed to following point.

b) The inverter is not pre-parameterised. These are cases in which even if the inverter is
part of a complete lift order, the autotuning execution is indicated as compulsory. Also in
those cases in which the inverter comes from another installation or from the own
customer warehouse or from the branch or if it has been supplied from Servicenter or
from the factory with a generic parameterisation.

In these cases, if we have the profile associated to the machine/installation or the

inverter parameterisation of another identical installation/machine that works properly,
we will set the parameters according to this document or to this configuration.

If the profile associated to the machine does not exist, the default values of these
parameters will be used as initial values. These values can be consulted in the parameter
table of the synchronous version (section 8.4).

c) We do not know whether it is pre-parameterised or not. In this case, contact MP for

support or use the default values of these parameters as initial values (section 8.4).

4) Move the car in inspection or rescue mode. If a speed error appears (11, 06 or 14)7 while starting,
we must set following parameters to following values:

a) POS.01 = 200 (usually, to 250 or 300).

b) VEL.00 = 15000 (usually to 20000).

If the problem persists, decrease VEL.00 up to 10000, never more than this.

5) If the problem persists, check that INT.09 = 2 and make the test with the following values of
PEC.00: 12.0 Khz, 14.0 Khz and 10.0 KHz.

What we are doing at this point is to configure the current filter (refer to Figure 12.2), by varying its
cut off frequency. This filter aim is eliminate the mechanical resonance frequencies. But we must
bear in mind that these frequencies are inherent to the complete lift: machine, guide rails, car,
counterweight, pulleys, etc.

7
For versions 612 and higher, unlike previous versions, there are three errors associated to speed:

• Error 06: Motor blocked: The machine is lower than the target speed.
• Error 11: Overspeed/runaway: The machine is higher than the target speed.
• Error 14: Overspeed in reverse: the machine moves in the opposite direction to the target direction.

V0.01 – 04/2013 132 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

Therefore, even if we know the machine profile, the latter can slightly vary depending on how the
assembly has been made.

Why is it adjusted by varying INT.09 and PEC.00? On one hand, by setting INT.09, we configure the
filter for a PEC.00 of 12.0 KHz. If we increase PEC.00, we are also proportionally increasing the cut
off frequency. If we decrease it lower than 12.0 KHz, we are also proportionally decreasing the cut
off frequency.

6) If the speed error persists (11, 06 or 14) while starting, we must know if it is caused by a machine
vibration or a movement’s wrong direction or an overspeed in reverse (due to a short circuit or any
phase disconnection). Therefore, we can cancel the speed error and just let the overspeed error on
the rated speed (TR0.03 = 0), then make the test in inspection or rescue mode. Do not forget to
restore this parameter to its initial value (10).

7) If in point 6 we determine that it is due to vibrations, decrease VEL.01 and VEL.03 up to 15000 and,
if the problem persists, up to 10000, never lower than this. If it is due to a movement’s wrong
direction or an overspeed in reverse, check the connection of the machine phases.

12.2.8. Check of the run direction

The run direction depends on three factors:

1. Connection of sinusoidal encoder
2. Connection motor phases
3. Location of the machine into the shaft: right or left.
In MP inverter/machine sets, the two first factors are fixed at the factory. However, since the inverter
can be supplied as a component or as part of a complete lift, this adjustment must be carried out in situ.

IMPORTANT NOTE
In this machine type (gearless/synchronous), never change the phases to modify the run direction, like we
use to do in induction machines (asynchronous).

To set the proper run direction, the following steps must be carried out:
1. SET THE CONTROL BOARD IN INSPECTION OR MES MODE.

2. PRESS TH UP (OR DOWN) BUTTON.

- If it goes downwards (or upwards) respectively, i.e., if it carries out the operation in the
opposite direction to commanded one, modify parameter CNF.05:

* If CNF.05 = 1, set CNF.05 = 0

* If CNF.05 = 0, set CNF.05 = 1

- Try again to press the up (or down) button.

V0.01 – 04/2013 133 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

12.2.9. Adjustment of S- curves

The speed is defined like the position change with respect to the time - first derivative of the
position.

The acceleration is defined like the speed change with respect to the time - first derivative of the
speed or second derivative of the position.

The jerk is defined like the acceleration change with respect to the time - first derivative of the
acceleration. Our sensitivity is associated to this magnitude, i.e., to the acceleration changes and this
is what may cause an unpleasant sensation to the car lift passengers while starting and stopping.

Therefore, these are the points (starting and stopping) where we have to assign the speed
commands to the motor in such a way as to achieve smooth changes of acceleration. The speed
profile we obtained this way is called S-curves.

In the following figure, we can see the profiles of speed, acceleration and jerk for a linear curve and
an S-curve.

FIGURE 12.5

3VFMAC-DSP 6P supports two types of S-curve: Standard and Sinusoidal.

We can select any of them by means of the parameter RSN.00 setting:

• 0: Standard
• 2: Sinusoidal

V0.01 – 04/2013 134 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
12.2.9.1. Standard curves

Standard S-curves are exactly the same that the ones incorporated in 3VFMAC1. We start from a
linear profile of the speed and by means of the constants RSN.01, RSN.02, RSN.03, RSN.04 we
smooth the slope changes of the speed.

o RSN.01, RSN.02: Acceleration Beginning and End; from speed 0 up to rated speed.
o RSN.03,RSN.04 : Deceleration Beginning and End; from rated speed up to approach speed

FIGURE 12.6

The higher the number set in parameters RSN.01-RSN.04, the more gentle in the associated zone.

IMPORTANT NOTE: When we use this type of curves, the acceleration time TR1.02 and
deceleration time TR1.04 are affected by the constants RSN.01-RSN.04. We could say that the
values set in TR1.02 and TR1.04 would be the acceleration and deceleration times if parameters
RSN.01-RSN.04 have the value 1. At the same time that these parameters are being increased,
the times of acceleration and deceleration are being increased too.

FIGURE 12.7

12.2.9.2. Sinusoidal curves

These curves are called sinusoidal since the profiles of the acceleration and jerk are sinusoidal.

An important difference to bear in mind with respect to standard curves is that this type of curves
observes scrupulously the acceleration time (TR1.02) and the deceleration time (TR1.04), using
exactly the time indicated by these parameters, neither more nor less.

Therefore, if we set too low values in these parameters, it may happen that we get errors like Err
04 (low voltage of capacitors), Err 02 (over current) or Err 13 (unstable voltage of capacitors). To
solve this problem, just increase TR1.02 and/or TR1.04.

Standard curves are said to be partial S-curves, since we start from a linear acceleration and we
modify, by means of constants and one by one, the zones of slope speed.

Sinusoidal S-curves are said to be complete S-curves, since the obtained speed curve corresponds
to a unique function which depends on the initial speed, final speed and time of acceleration or
deceleration. That is, 3VFMAC-DSP 6P determine the complete curve for these parameters.

V0.01 – 04/2013 135 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
There is only one point left to be treated: modification factor for acceleration curve (TR1.03,
TR1.05). The modification factor for acceleration curve is nothing less than a "deformer" of the
curve in such a way that:

• the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end and
vice versa, and
• the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the end.

The value that does not "deform" the curve (neutral value) is 1.00. The most convenient is to
smooth the acceleration at low speeds. Therefore, the default value of TR1.03 (modification factor
for acceleration curve) is 1.50.

12.2.9.3. Which type of curve to choose?

Whenever it is possible, the sinusoidal S-curve (default value): The obtained jerk is lower than
the one resulting from standard curves.

12.2.9.4. Adjustment process for standard curves

1. Adjustment of the acceleration curve: TR1.02, RSN.01, RSN.02

The adjustment of the acceleration curve corresponding to the standard curves consists of the
adjustment of 3 parameters:

• TR1.02 (acceleration time)

• RSN.01 (constant of acceleration beginning)
• RSN.02 (constant of acceleration end)

These three parameters have to be simultaneously adjusted. Let us remind, as already

mentioned in section “12.2.9.1. Standard curves” of this document that the acceleration final
time depends on these 3 parameters, because TR1.02 is affected by the constants RSN.01 and
RSN.02: the higher these constants, the gentler the beginning and the end of the acceleration
and the longer the final time invested.

The values set in these parameters will be a compromise between the required comfort during
the acceleration curve and the final time invested in the acceleration.

The default values for these parameters are TR1.02 = 2.50 s, RSN.01 = 50, RSN.02 = 50.

2. Adjustment of the deceleration curve: TR1.04, RSN.03, RSN.04

The adjustment of the deceleration curve corresponding to the standard curves consists of the
adjustment of 3 parameters:

• TR1.04 (deceleration time)

• RSN.03 (constant of deceleration beginning)
• RSN.04 (constant of deceleration end)

These three parameters have to be simultaneously adjusted. Let us remind, as already

mentioned in section “12.2.9.2. Standard curves” of this document that the acceleration final
time depends on these 3 parameters, because TR1.04 is affected by the constants RSN.03 and
RSN.04: the higher these constants, the gentler the beginning and the end of the deceleration
and the longer the final time invested.

Once the approach speed, is reached, it is important it remains stable for a time between 1 and
2 seconds.

To do this, we will use the viewing "FrEC" where the low speed command must be displayed for
the indicated time: between 1 and 2 seconds:

- If it is displayed for less than one second, we can:

V0.01 – 04/2013 136 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

• Or reduce the deceleration time (TR1.04). We have to do this carefully because a too low
value in this parameter can cause Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. We will do this by decreasing
0.20 seconds at a time.
• Or slightly reduce RSN.03 without compromising the comfort at the deceleration beginning,
by using decreases of 20 units.
• Or slightly reduce RSN.04 without compromising the comfort at the deceleration end, by
using decreases of 20 units at a time.
• Or increase the approach speed, by increases of 0.5 Hz at a time.

- If it is displayed for more than 2 seconds, we can:

• Or increase RSN.04
• Or increase RSN.03
• Or increase the deceleration time (TR1.04).

12.2.9.5. Adjustment process for sinusoidal curves

1. Adjustment of the acceleration time: TR1.02

As already mentioned in section “12.2.9.2. Sinusoidal curves”, this type of curves

scrupulously observes the times of acceleration set in TR1.02.

It is not recommended to set too low values in these parameters are, because it may cause
errors like Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13.

We will configure this acceleration time according to the gentleness that we want to give during
the acceleration. The default value is 2.50 s.

2. Adjustment of the modification factor for acceleration: TR1.03

This parameter affects only the profile of the target speed during the acceleration:

• the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end and
vice versa, and
• the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the end.

This parameter affects only the speed profile. It does NOT affect the acceleration time: it does
not increase or decrease it.

Its default value is 1.50.

3. Adjustment of the modification factor for deceleration: TR1.04

The sinusoidal curves scrupulously observe the times set in TR1.04. A too low value may cause
errors like Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13.

Once the approach speed is reached it is important it remains stable for a time between 1 and 2
seconds.

To do this, we will use the viewing "FrEC" where the low speed command must be displayed for
the indicated time: between 1 and 2 seconds:

- If it is displayed for less than one second, we can:

• Or slightly reduce the deceleration time (TR1.04). We have to do this carefully because
a too low value in this parameter may cause Err 02, Err 04 or Err 13. We will do this by
decreasing 0.20 seconds at a time.
• Or increase the approach speed, by increases of 0.5 Hz at a time.
• Or both.

- If it is displayed for more than 2 seconds, we will increase the deceleration time, by increases
of (TR1.04) of 0.20 seconds, until reaching the indicated range.

V0.01 – 04/2013 137 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
4. Adjustment of the modification factor for deceleration: TR1.05

This parameter affects “only” the profile of the target speed during the deceleration:

• the higher the value, the softer the beginning of the curve and the harder at the end and
vice versa, and
• the lower the value, the less gentle the beginning of the curve and the softer at the end.

When we say that it affects only the speed profile, we mean that it does not affect the
deceleration time: it does not increase or decrease it.

Its default value is 1.00.

12.2.10. Adjustment of levelling

12.2.10.1. Stopping time (RSN.05)

The parameter RSN.05 is the stopping time: i.e., how long it takes to the lift to get from the
approach speed to speed 0. Values with milliseconds accuracy can be introduced.

The stopping S-curve is ALWAYS sinusoidal type -with modification factor 1.00, independently of
the S-curve type selected (RSN.00 = 0 or RSN.00 = 2). The unique parameterisable datum of the
stopping curve is the time.

It has been designed like this because, as already mentioned in previous section, the sinusoidal
curve jerk is much lower than the standard curve one.

12.2.10.2. Levelling adjustment

The aim of the levelling adjustment process is not the exact levelling with floor level; the real aim
is to achieve a uniform stopping point (always the same) independently of the load, either up or
down service.

Once this is achieved, the levelling magnets will be moved in order to make the lift stopping point
coincide with the floor level.

Hereafter, the sequence of the actions to be carried out in order to achieve the levelling
adjustment is explained. These actions must be made according to this sequence, because if the
order is modified, it will be very difficult to achieve a proper levelling of the lift.

The adjustment procedure is different whether the installation is going to operate in open-loop
(without encoder) or in closed-loop (with encoder).

V0.01 – 04/2013 138 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

1. Readjustment of TR1.01: Optional

The aim of the readjustment of TR1.01 is to make a first rough approximation of the
distance between the magnetic reader and the magnet, leaving RSN.05 for the fine
adjustment.

Thus, once adjusted, the value of the stopping time parameter RSN.05 would be neither too
high nor too low. In some cases, too high could cause problems in stopping with full load.
Too low could cause an abrupt stopping.

To carry out this adjustment phase, a person will get on the car roof to take the required
measurements. The steps to follow are:

a. Choose a destination intermediate floor (D)

b. Choose a departure floor A in such a way that:

- It is located above the destination floor D

- It is not the highest floor
- There are at least two levels until the destination floor

c. Choose a second departure floor B in such a way that:

- It is located bellow the destination floor D

- It is not the lowest floor
- There are at least two levels until the destination floor D

d. Make a travel from the upper departure floor A until D. Measure the distance from
the magnet beginning up to the place where the magnetic reader is, as shown in the
figure.

FIGURE 12.8

e. Make a travel from the lower departure floor B until D. Measure the distance from
the magnet beginning up to the place where the magnetic reader is, as shown in the
figure.

V0.01 – 04/2013 139 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
Lift running
upwards

Level Signal from

Magnetic Reader
(i.e. MAC325)

Stopping distance
in up direction

FIGURE 12.9

f. Analyse the obtained result for the runs carried out:

- If the obtained distance is higher than 5 cm, decrease TR1.01 in 0.5Hz.

After decreasing it, if there are vibrations on approach, restore the last value
and proceed to next point (2).

Once the modification has been done, proceed to point d.

- If the obtained distance is lower than 4 cm, increase TR1.01 in 0.5 Hz.

Once the modification has been done, proceed to point d.

- If it is about 4 or 5 cm for both runs, proceed to next point (2).

2. Levelling in up direction and in down direction (Adjustment of RSN.05)

a. Choose a destination intermediate floor (D)

b. Choose a departure floor A in such a way that:

- It is located above the destination floor D

- It is not the highest floor
- There are at least two levels until the destination floor

c. Choose a second departure floor B in such a way that:

- It is located above the destination floor D

- It is not the lowest floor
- There are at least two levels until the destination floor

d. Make a travel from the upper departure floor A until D, WITHOUT LOAD.

e. Make a travel from the lower departure floor B until D, WITHOUT LOAD.

f. Analyse the obtained result for the runs carried out:

- In the downwards service (d), if we obtain a stopping point higher than the one
obtained after the upwards service (e), increase RSN.05 slightly and gradually, by
increases of 0.050 seconds (for example: from 0.800 to 0.850).

Once RSN.05 is modified, return to point.

V0.01 – 04/2013 140 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
- In the downwards service (d), if we obtain a stopping point lower than the one
obtained after the upwards service (e), decrease RSN.05 slightly and gradually, by
decreases of 0,050 seconds (for example: from 0.800 to 0.750).

Return to point d after RSN.05 is modified.

- If the levelling point coincides in both cases (d, e), proceed to relocate the level
magnets.

3. Relocation of level magnets

Previous adjustments enable to make the lift stop at the same point, with or without load,
and in up direction or in down direction.

Then, we just have to make that (already uniform) point coincide with the floor level. To
do so, duly move the magnets which determine the levelling point at each floor, and
correct the existing deviations at every stopping.

NOTE: If there is any case where the modification is higher than 5 cm, the points of
deceleration beginning (pulse magnets) will have to be modified in order to keep constant
the deceleration section and the approach section to floor.

Finally, we must check that the distance between the approach magnet and the stopping
magnet is the same at every single level.

12.2.11. Adjustment of short floors

12.2.11.1. What is a short floor?

The notion of "short floor" within the inverter context is different from the notion of "short floor"
within the control board context.

Here, we talk about "short floor" from the inverter point of view when the rated speed is not
achieved during a service. It may occur because:

• it is a particularly short floor, or

• during the service between adjacent floors, the rated speed is not achieved either. This
is the most common case. It happens in those lifts working at 1.6 m/s or 1.0 m/s,
with large acceleration sections.

This circumstance can be appreciated in the value of the viewing "FrEC" which falls short of
reaching the rated speed.

12.2.11.2. Adjustment aim

When configuring a "short floor", the main aim is that the time elapsing at low speed is not
excessive, in such a way that the service would take longer than required.

12.2.11.3. How to adjust a short floor?

There are two parameters, both in group RSC (Short S-Ramp), to adjust short floors: RSC.00 and
RSC.01.

FIGURE 12.10

V0.01 – 04/2013 141 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

When the inverter meets the signal of approach frequency, it makes the following:

• It will go on with the frequency ramp a “little more”, i.e., it will go on increasing the
frequency a “little more”.

- For standard S-curves, this “little more” is automatically calculated by the inverter
according to the acceleration time and the cut off frequency, in the same way its
predecessor, el 3VFMAC1, did it.

- For sinusoidal S-curves, this “little more” is quantified by parameter RSC.01. By

default, it is set to a value of 50. The longer RSC.01, it will go on increasing the
frequency for longer and, therefore, the shorter approach time.

• After completion of the frequency ramp, it can keep the frequency reached for a certain time
which will be calculated from the RSC.00 parameter value:

RSC.00 is the time during which the final frequency of the ramp cut off is going to be kept if
the latter was half of the rated frequency. Thus, the higher the frequency at the end of the
cut off ramp, the shorter the extension time and vice versa, the lower this frequency, the
longer the extension time. Thus, the tendency is always to achieve the set objective: reduce
the time at low frequency. The formula is the following one:

TR1.00 x RSC.00
 CUT OFF FREQ/SPEED 
 
 2 

For instance: let us suppose that TR1.00 = 20.00 Hz and RSC.00 = 1.000 s.

CUT OFF
Extension Time
FRECUENCY
5.00 Hz 2.000 s
10.0 Hz = TR1/2 1.000 s = RSC.00
15.00 Hz 0.667 s
20.00 Hz 0.500 s

TABLE 12.8

Parameter RSC.00 applies for both types of curves (sinusoidal and standard). Nevertheless,
when selecting Sinusoidal S-curves (RSN.00 = 2), it is usually set it to zero (RSC.00 =
0.000), because the adjustment of RSC.01 may normally be enough.

V0.01 – 04/2013 142 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

12.2.12. Adjustments of position control. Starting and stopping

Version 613 allows the starting and stopping configuration, in an independent way.

The parameters shown in the following table will be used:

PARAM DESCRIPTION RANGE

0 : Deactivated
1: Activated, speed integral in
starting and stopping
POS.00 Position control mode
2: Activated, speed integral only in
stopping
3: Activated, no speed integral
It determines the value of the
POS.01 Starting. Proportional Constant
position control constant proportional

It determines the value of the

POS.02 Stopping Proportional Constant
position control constant proportional
TABLE 12.9

To adjust these parameters, the best option would be to make it with the maximum load. However, this case
is usually impracticable; therefore, we describe the adjustment made with an empty car.

The adjustment of these parameters is carried out in the following way:

• In 2:1 installations: the position control mode POS.00 is set to 1 and POS.01 and POS.02 are
adjusted with same value.

We start with 200 and increase 50 by 50 units until the rollback disappears, both at starting and at
stopping. Then, we stop.

The tests will be done at departure and arrival at the top level (with empty car).

Once the value is determined, we will make the test at the intermediate level and at the lowest one.
If the machine makes oscillations or rumble, decrease the value of 50 by 50 units, until this effect
disappears.

In this type of installations, the values are usually included in a range between 200 and 400.

• In 1:1 installations: the position control mode POS.00 00 is set to 2 and POS.01 and POS.02 are
adjusted in an independent way.

Installations with a 1:1 suspension are more likely to a stroke on the starting; it is more a feeling
than an actual vibration, like a fast elastic movement, before the beginning of the travel. To avoid
this behaviour, the position control mode POS.00 is set to 2. POS.01 and POS.02 are adjusted in the
following way:

POS.01 Position control at starting.

We start with from the initial value of 500. We will make the test from the highest floor and increase 50 by 50
units in order to reduce as much as possible the starting jerk when the brake opens.

Here, we have to be careful in order to distinguish whether it happens when the brake opens or when the
movement begins.

It is the first case we are mentioning in this point.

Once the value is determined, we will make the test at the intermediate level and at the lowest one. If the
machine makes oscillations or rumble, decrease the value of 50 by 50 units.

POS.02 Position control at stopping.

We start with 200 and increase 50 by 50 units until the rollback appears when stopping at the highest floor.

Once the value is determined, we will make the test at the intermediate level and at the lowest one. If the
machine makes oscillations or rumble, decrease the value of 50 by 50 units.

V0.01 – 04/2013 143 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
12.2.13. Adjustments of brake

The 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter is basically provided with 4 parameters for the adjustment of the
activation/deactivation of the machine brake. These parameters are related in following table:

PARAM DESCRIPTION RANGE

STC.08 It determines the role of pin 19 in XC2 0: Reset/Error
connector. 1: N/Open Brake microswitches
reading/activated
2: N/Closed Brake microswitches
reading/deactivated
STC.00 Delay between brake activation
command and start of motor spinning.
00.01..02.50 s
I.e., time between brake relay
activation and brake opening.
STC.02 Time elapsed between brake
deactivation and motor power failure
at stopping. 00.01..02.50 s
I.e., time between brake relay
activation and brake closing.
STC.09 It determines the time current drop
once the brake has been activated. 0.00..3.00

TABLE 12.10

Synchronous machines (gearless) are usually provided with two brakes coupled to the motor’s rotor where
also the machine pulley is directly coupled. Each brake includes a microswitch to enable its state monitoring.

To optimize the starting and stopping times, the reading of brake microswitches must be enabled.

If you want to comply with A3 Amendment of EN81 or, only meet safety recommendations, just wire the
normally closed contacts in series and connect them to terminals 5, 6 of connector XMAQ (schemas 12.1,
12.2). These contacts go straight to the input XC2/19 of the inverter.

To enable the reading of the normally closed brake microswitches, we must set parameter STC.08 to 2 (refer
to table 12.10) and/or enable the A3 Amendment function (A3A.00 = 1).

When connecting the brake microswitches, the inverter console displays “rESEt” blinking, it means that the
input XC2/19 is configured with error reset.

12.2.13.1. Opening and closing times. Reading of the machine brake microswitches

Reading of brake microswitches deactivated (Not recommended. Not in compliance with A3/EN-81
Amendment): STC.08 = 0.

When starting, the inverter’s brake relay KRL3 will be activated. After STC.00 seconds are elapsed, the
movement will start.

When stopping, the inverter’s brake relay KRL3 will be deactivated. After STC.02 seconds are elapsed, the
motor power failure will start.

The opening and closing times of the brakes depend on the temperature and the input voltage and they can
be different each other.

If the values of parameters STC.00 and STC.02 are too tight, when the installation conditions (voltage and
temperature) change, the inverter may issue errors 18 and 19.

If we adjust them taking into account the worst conditions, we will be penalising the starting and stopping
times.

This is the reason why it is not recommended.

The opening (STC.00) and closing (STC.02) times are adjusted in the same way but independently. We will
start from value 1.20 s.

• If no error appears, decrease by 0.20 s at a time until error 18 or 19 appears. The resulting
value must be increased in 0.50 s.

• • If error 18 or 19 appears, increase the value by 0.20 s at a time until error disappears. The
resulting value must be increased in 0.50 s.

V0.01 – 04/2013 144 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

VERY IMPORTANT

THIS CONFIGURATION IS NOT IN COMPLIANCE WITH A3 AMENDEMENT OF STANDARD

EN81.

Reading of brake microswitches activated: STC.08 = 1, 2 or A3A.00 = 1 (Recommended)

When starting, the inverter’s brake relay KRL3 will be activated. The moment it is determined by the reading
of brake microswitches that the machine brake is mechanically opened the movement will start. After STC.00
seconds are elapsed if the brake remains closed, error 19 will occur.

When stopping, the inverter’s brake relay KRL3 will be deactivated. The moment it is determined by the
reading of brake microswitches that the machine brake is mechanically closed, the motor power failure will
start. After STC.02 seconds are elapsed if the brake remains opened, error 18 will occur.

Therefore, as a general rule, the values of STC.00 and STC.02 must be set to 2.00 s, since the inverter will
detect by the reading of brake microswitches at what moment it opened or closed. If there is any problem
with the brake and the latter does not open (or close) after two seconds and half, an error of reading of brake
microswitches (18, 19) occurs.

If any kind of error occurs in the inverter during the stopping, the latter would be abruptly carried out. A
classic case could be that the control board opens the contactors due to an opening in the safety chain. Then,
the inverter would issue error 0E. In principle, it would not be a matter of stopping adjustment; so we must
analyse the error cause and correct it.

If we activate the A3 Amendment (A3A.00 = 1, 2) function, we will be activating reading of normally closed
brake microswitches, independently of the value of STC.08.

12.2.13.2. Motor power failure

After the machine brake is mechanically closed, the motor power failure starts. If the motor power is abruptly
cut off, a “klonk” would be heard and a little jerk would be felt in the car (since the car would not move). Do
not confuse this “klonk” and the little jerk sensation with an oscillation and an actual movement of an abrupt
stopping caused by an error occurrence (refer to previous section).

This “klonk” is due to the small clearance in the machine brake. At stopping, if the machine power is abruptly
cut off, the load will cause an abrupt movement in the favourable direction.

This effect is neither critical nor problematic, since the brake is already closed. However, this unpleasant
sensation can be removed by means of parameter STC.09, whose value is the time, stated in seconds, of the
current drop ramp.

The default value of this parameter is 1.00 s. To adjust these parameters, the best option would be to make it
at the lowest floor with the maximum load. However, this case is usually impracticable; therefore, we
describe the adjustment made with an empty car and at the arrival to the highest floor.

In short, with the value of parameter STC.09 set to 1.00 s, we distinguish two initial cases:

1. If the “klonk” is not heard: in this case, it is a matter of decreasing this value until the “klonk” is
heard. The resulting value must be increased in 0.20 s.

2. If the “klonk” is heard: in this case, it is a matter of decreasing this value until the “klonk” is heard.
The resulting value must be increased in 0.20 s.

V0.01 – 04/2013 145 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

The Figure 12.11 shows the flow diagram corresponding to the sequence of action to be carried out in order
to adjust parameter STC.09.

START

INITIAL VALUE
STC.00 = 1.00 s

LANDING AT TOP
FLOOR WITH
EMPTY CAR

Is there a «klonk» after

NO YES
brake closes ?

DECREASE INCREASE
0.10 s 0.10 s
PARAMETER PARAMETER
STC.09 STC.09
NO YES

LANDING AT TOP LANDING AT TOP

FLOOR WITH FLOOR WITH
EMPTY CAR EMPTY CAR

Is there a «klonk» after Is there a «klonk» after

brake closes ? brake closes ?

YES NO

INCREASE INCREASE
0.20 s 0.10 s
PARAMETER PARAMETER
STC.09 STC.09

FINISH

FIGURE 12.11

V0.01 – 04/2013 146 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13. OTHER SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

13.1. Adjustment of sensors
13.1.1. General

The adjustment process of current sensors applies both to synchronous and asynchronous motors.

This process’ aim is the adjustment of the amplitude of the current V phase in respect to the one of U phase,
carried out at the rated current point of output to motor, in such a way the error is lower than 1%.

In asynchronous inverters, the output rated current is determined by the inverter type in terms of
power/voltage. Refer to table of specifications in section 16 of the present document.

In synchronous inverters, the output rated current is determined by parameter DRI.07, whose maximum
value corresponds to the rated current of the device in terms of power/voltage.

Unlike the autotuning process, the no-load machine is NOT required; so no need to remove the traction cables
of car and counterweight from the machine pulley.

13.1.2. Process execution

The process execution of the adjustment of sensors is carried out through parameter TUN.01. To
modify/execute this parameter, there is no need to enter SETUP with advanced access code.

To command the process execution of the adjustment of sensors, set the parameter TUN.01 to value 00001.

To complete the process and as a result of it, if no error occurred during the course, the adjustment of the V
phase current as well as the values of a group of parameters will be set and, in addition, the parameter
TUN.01 itself will be set to zero.

If any error occurs and/or the process is interrupted in any way, NO parameter will be modified.

We must remind, as already mentioned in previous section, that the process execution of the adjustment of
sensors does NOT require no-load machine, since it will not even open the brake.

The process of the adjustment of sensors consists of following steps:

* STEP 1: Set the control board in inspection or MES mode.

* STEP 2: Activate the adjustment of sensors: TUN.01 = 00001.

* STEP 3: Exit the SETUP mode.

* STEP 4: The console will display, blinking and alternately:

S t A r t A d J i n

* STEP 5: Keep on pressing the up or down button of the rescue command or of the inspection box.
Along the process the display will show, blinking:

A d J X X
where XX represents the adjustment number which is being carried out at every moment.

The process will take between 30 and 45 seconds, during which the machine must remain
motionless and the brake deactivated.

V0.01 – 04/2013 147 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

* STEP 6: If the process is completed without errors, the console will display, blinking:

S A V i n
At this moment, the parameters of current adjustment are being recorded.

IMPORTANT: AT THIS POINT, WE MUST KEEP ON PRESSING THE UP OR DOWN BUTTON.

* STEP 7: At the end, the console will display, blinking and alternately:

A d J i n E n d

IMPORTANT: IT IS AT THIS MOMENT WHEN WE CAN STOP PRESSING THE UP OR DOWN

BUTTON, SINCE THE PROCESS IS COMPLETED, NEVER BEFORE.

* STEP 8: Stop pressing the up or down button.

* STEP 9: Additional actions. Process completed.

If the process has been achieved without errors, parameter TUN.01 will return to zero, and there
will be NO need to touch it up.

If any error occurred during the process, the information related to it will be displayed in the
console; the inverter will be out of service. In this case, the value of TUN.01 will go on being
00001.

13.1.3. Errors of adjustment of sensors

If any error occurred during the process, NONE of the changes in current adjustments would be effective, the
corresponding error would be displayed and the inverter state would be permanent out of service.

The errors associated to the process of adjustment of sensors are related in following table:

CODE DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSES

Stop caused by a user before autotuning
D0 Time-out. completion.
Current sensors (any channel)
Maximum number of
Connection failure in motor phases/3VF.
D1 retry attempts
(any phase disconnected)
exceeded.
Wrong departure adjustment.
Interruption of current Stop caused by a user before completion.
D2 sensor adjustment
process.
TABLE 13.2.2

13.2. Test Mode (asynchronous motors only)

13.2.1. General

Test mode is a special operation mode in which the inverter informs, via console, about the state of current
sensors and encoder. This procedure does not generate errors, it just informs about them when existing.

The test mode activation is carried out through parameter TST.00. When this parameter is set to value 1, we
are activating the test mode. When it set to value 0, the test mode is deactivated.

V0.01 – 04/2013 148 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.2.2. Process execution

• STEP 1: Configure the inverter in open-loop mode: CNF.00 = 0. Otherwise, the results would not
be reliable in terms of encoder check.

• STEP 2: Activate the test mode: TST.00 = 1.

• STEP 3: Configure the inverter in open-loop mode: CNF.00 = 0. Otherwise, the results would not
be reliable in terms of encoder check.

• STEP 4: With the inverter in RUN mode, in idle state, two different texts can appear:

Option 1: Blinking every two seconds:

t e s t
After this text appears three consecutive times, we can determine that the sensors are
correct.

Option 2: Blinking:

t S t 0 1

That means that the current sensors of output to motor are defective. The immediate
replacement of the device is recommended.

During this process execution, if it appears on the console, even once, tSt01, the test of the
current sensors will be considered as bad.

• STEP 5: Make an upward travel and another one downward, since the encoder check can only be
achieved with the lift in motion.

Every two seconds, the following must appear, blinking:

t e s t

We will determine that the encoder reading is right if, during both travels, the console does NEVER
display the following blinking message:

t S t 0 2

The most common problems associated to the encoder are:

- One or more cables of encoder signal do not make contact because, when inserting the cable
into the Wago connector, it "bites" the plastic cover and not the cable.

- Confusion in the connection order of the connector cables.

- Power supply outage of the encoder. Then, the "Encod" viewing value would be 0 in any
situation.

Once the required checks are made, check again the encoder from the beginning.

• STEP 6: Deactivate the test mode: TST.00 = 0. If required, in addition, set back to closed-loop
operation mode (CNF.00 = 1).

V0.01 – 04/2013 149 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.3. 3VF Rescue Modes

13.3.1. General

3VF RESCUE Modes are special operation modes. They are activated in the event that power supply is
interrupted and automatically carried out by the main board and 3VFMAC-DSP 6P.

In the event of power supply outage, this process’ aim is to take the car to floor level and open the doors.
Then, the process is completed.

At the present moment, 3 3VF rescue modes are coexisting:

• DSP RESCUE 5 BATTERIES

• DSP RESCUE 4 BATTERIES
• DSP-UPS RESCUE (without batteries)

Currently manufactured controllers provided with rescue system are supplied with DSP rescue-4 batteries or
DPS-UPS rescue (without batteries).

DSP rescue-5 batteries was the first type of DSP rescue launched on the market and, therefore, 3VFMAC-DSP
6P inverters maintains full compatibility, both on software and hardware.

The implementation of 3VF Rescue Modes is carried out by a set consisting of the following elements: UPS,
switching contactors (if existing), batteries (if existing), wiring, inverter software and control board software.
We refer to this element group as rescue system.

Therefore, the control board and 3VFMAC-DSP 6P itself must be specifically prepared for the execution of this
special operation mode. The required elements are different according to the involved rescue mode, as
detailed in following table.

MOTOR BATTERY SWITCHING

RESCUE MODE UPS
TYPE CHARGER CONTACTORS

DSP RESCUE
5 BATTERIES
• • •
(VESTA) (CARBAT 60V) KG, KUPS

DSP RESCUE
4 BATTERIES
• • •
(APC) (CHARGER 48V) KPW

DSP-UPS RESCUE
(WITHOUT BATTERIES)
• N/A <None>
(APC)
TABLE 13.1

The DSP rescue with 4 batteries is applied as standard to asynchronous machines. The DSP-UPS rescue
without batteries is applied as standard to synchronous machines.

In the two modes of DSP rescue with batteries (4 or 5), the latter will supply energy to the traction machine
and the UPS will supply the main board, the inverter, the machine brake and the door operator.

The 3VF rescue is an automatic rescue mode (disregarded) which is activated in the event of power supply
outage. In synchronous motors, do not mix up this rescue mode with the rescue system by means of
unbalanced load.

The rescue system by means of unbalanced load only applies to synchronous motors. It is carried out by the
RESMON board and it is provided with a UPS unit for the supply of the brake and the door operator. In
synchronous motors, both rescue modes may coexist.

13.3.2. DSP Rescue-5 batteries

To check that a 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter is ready for an automatic rescue with 5 batteries, a series of checks
must be done at wiring and parameterisation.

For the execution of automatic rescue-5 batteries with asynchronous machines, the machine must necessarily
be provided with an industrial encoder.

Concerning asynchronous machines, remind that they cannot be controlled without an absolute/sinusoidal
encoder and the rescue operation is not an exception to this rule.

V0.01 – 04/2013 150 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.3.2.1. Wiring (synchronous and asynchronous)

To determine that the inverter is ready to carry out an automatic rescue with 5 batteries, we must check the
power wiring section and the wiring of the voltage-free input of control signal for the rescue mode activation.

Power stage

Terminals C2 and C3 must be

FULLY INSULATED.

If C2 and C3 are not duly insulated, a short circuit

may occur, with the attendant risk for the safety. In
addition, the device might be irreversibly damaged.
C2-
C3 The remaining connections will be made according to
the following table:
TERMINAL CONNECT CABLE
3VF With label… Ended with…
C3 C3 ring
C2 faston
+CE / C2 +CE ring
C2 ring

F3 and F4 fuse holders must remain EMPTY,

WITHOUT FUSES.

Next to them, in the upper part, there is a female

XC12, Wago connector of 2 poles (XC12).
F3-F4
Connect the female 2-pole special connector to the
terminals labelled as S1-S2 in XC12 (400 Vac).

TERMINAL CONNECT CABLE

3VF With label … Ended with…
C1, C1 C1 faston
-CE -CE -CE (capacitors) faston/ring

TABLE 13.2

VERY IMPORTANT: ANY ERROR OR FAILURE IN THE DISCRBED CONNECTIONS MAY LEAD TO A SHORT-
CIRCUIT AND/OR AN ELECTRICAL FAILURE THAT MAY ENDANGER THE SAFETY OF PEOPLE HANDLING THE
INVERTER, AND CAUSE AN IRREVERSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE DEVICE.

Control signal

There is a signal of voltage-free input through which the main board informs the inverter that the rescue
mode is activated.

This input is enabled through terminals 20-23 of connector XC3:

V0.01 – 04/2013 151 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

PICTURE 13.1

13.3.2.2. Parameterisation in asynchronous motor version

The parameters associated to 3VF rescue the activation and parameterisation in asynchronous motor version
are gathered into RES group, as shown in following table:

PARAM NAME DESCRIPTION RANGE VALUE

0: Disabled
1: Enabled automatic rescue mode
Specifies the with batteries, WITHOUT detecting
RES.00 activation/deactivation and favourable direction.
Rescue mode 2
configuration of the rescue 2: Enabled automatic rescue mode
mode with batteries, WITH detecting
favourable direction
(recommended).
0.10..15.00 Hz
RES.01 Speed in Specifies the speed in (We recommend setting the same
4.00 Hz
rescue mode rescue mode value like in low speed TR1.01, or
less).
RES.02 Starting Specifies the percentage of
2.0-90.0 % 60%
voltage bus voltage at starting
TABLE 13.3

V0.01 – 04/2013 152 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.3.2.3. Parameterisation in synchronous motor version

The parameters associated to 3VF rescue the activation and parameterisation in synchronous motor version
are gathered into RES group, as shown in following table:

PARAM NAME DESCRIPTION RANGE VALUE

0: Disabled
1: 3VF Rescue -5 batteries
enabled, WITHOUT detecting
Specifies the favourable direction
activation/deactivation and 2: 3VF Rescue -5 batteries
RES.00 Rescue mode 2
configuration of the rescue enabled, WITH detecting
mode favourable direction
(recommended).
3: DSP-UPS Rescue (with
batteries).
0.10..15.00 Hz
Acc. to profile
Speed in Specifies the speed in (We recommend setting the same
RES.01 Usually, 10% of
rescue mode rescue mode value like in low speed TR1.01 or
rated speed
less)
TABLE 13.4

13.3.2.4. Process description

In this rescue mode (DSP-5 batteries), there are two switching contactors: KG and KUPS. In normal mode,
KG is closed KUPS is open. In rescue mode, KG is open and KUPS is closed. These contactors can NEVER be
closed at the same time. Therefore, they are mechanically interlocked.

The sequence would be the following one:

1. Cut off the electrical flow.

2. KG opens and KUPS closes, shifting into rescue mode. At transition, the reset of the control board
and the inverter may occur.

3. After about 30 seconds, the rescue travel begins.

4. When reaching the floor level, the control board opens contactors K1 and K2 and the inverter
displays error 0E.

5. The control board opens the doors and, after a certain time (control board parameter “Time for
Next Service”), it deactivates KUPS.

6. At this moment, if the power supply has been restored, KG closes and we shift to normal mode.
Otherwise, the control board would switch off until the electrical flow is restored.

During the rescue execution, if the power supply is restored, KG remains open and KUPS remains closed, and
the rescue operation is carried out. After the rescue travel completion and when the time specified by the
control board is elapsed, the latter deactivates KUPS contactor and closes KG contactor.

The batteries, whose charge is controlled by the CARBAT board, provide energy to the machine ONLY; the
UPS supplies power to all the other elements involved in rescue operation: control board, inverter, machine
brake, door operator, etc.

In regard with the inverter, the following scheme describes the rescue process, taking as a reference the
information provided by 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter on the console.

V0.01 – 04/2013 153 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
START
LED “EM” LIGHTS UP

HIGH Batteries LOW

Voltage
Check

OK

NO RUN
Command

WITH DETECTION YES WITHOUT DETECTION

OF FAVORABLE OF FAVORABLE
DIRECTION DIRECTION
( RES.00 = 2 ) ( RES.00 = 1 )
Rescue Mode

Machine
Type

Since the synchronous

In order to find out the
machines make position
favorable direction, two
control at starting, there’s no
«short» travels are made
need to make the «short»
in every direction.
tavels for detection.
ó

Upwards or Downwards, the

ó one which demands less
energy

When the lift reaches the level,

the control board will open the
contactors and will turn off
+ RUN input signal of the
Input Signal RUN inverter.
GOES OFF

FINISH

FIGURE 13.1

V0.01 – 04/2013 154 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

Two further remarks:

1. During all the rescue process, the rescue signal (XC3-20/23) will remain activated. If the rescue
signal input is deactivated during the process execution for more than 3 seconds, the inverter will
interrupt the rescue operation. If the signal is reactivated, the process will start from the beginning.

2. In rescue mode, the only voltage-free input of the main board connector (XC2/XC10) that 3VFMAC-
DSP 6P will consider is the RUN signal (#13), whose activation will determine the moment from
which the rescue service will be carried out. The speed will be the rescue speed and the direction will
depend on the rescue configuration (WITH or WITHOUT detecting favourable direction).

13.3.3. DSP Rescue-4 batteries

To check that a 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter is ready for the automatic rescue with 4 batteries, a series of checks
must be done at wiring and parameterisation.

The automatic rescue with 4 batteries applies to asynchronous machines.

It is compulsory that the machine is provided with an industrial encóder.

13.3.3.1. Wiring

To determine that the inverter is ready to carry out an automatic rescue with 4 batteries, we must check the
power wiring section and the wiring of the voltage-free input of control signal for the rescue mode activation.

Power stage

The connection points C2 and C3 must be joined by means

of a metal plate.

TERMINAL CONNECT CABLE

C2- 3VF With label… Ended with…
C3
C2 faston
C3/+CE/C2
+CE ring

F3 and F4 fuse holders must remain EMPTY, WITHOUT

FUSES.

Next to them, in the upper part, there is a female Wago

XC12, connector of 2 poles (XC12).
F3-F4
Connect the female 2-pole special connector to the
terminals labelled as S1-S2 in XC12 (400 Vac).

In addition to the connections of C1 an negative pole of the

capacitors (-CE faston), the rescue negative pole must be
connected, also labelled as -CE.

TERMINAL CONNECT CABLE

3VF With label … Ended with …
C1,-
C1 C1 faston
CE
-CE -CE (capacitors) faston/ring
-CE (rescue
-CE negative pole) ring (fuse nut)
∅ acc. to power

TABLE 13.5

V0.01 – 04/2013 155 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

VERY IMPORTANT: ANY ERROR OR FAILURE IN THE DISCRBED CONNECTIONS MAY LEAD TO A SHORT-
CIRCUIT AND/OR AN ELECTRICAL FAILURE THAT MAY ENDANGER THE SAFETY OF PEOPLE HANDLING THE
INVERTER, AND CAUSE AN IRREVERSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE DEVICE.

Control signal

There is a signal of voltage-free input through which the main board informs the inverter that the rescue
mode is activated.

This input is enabled through terminals 20-23 of connector XC3:

PICTURE 13.2

V0.01 – 04/2013 156 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.3.3.2. Parameterisation

PARAM NAME DESCRIPTION RANGE VALUE

0: Disabled
Specifies the 1: Enabled, WITHOUT detecting
RES.00 activation/deactivation and favourable direction.
Rescue mode 2
configuration of the rescue 2: Enabled, WITH detecting
mode favourable direction
(recommended).
0.10..15.00 Hz
RES.01 Speed in Specifies the speed in
(We recommend setting the same 4.00 Hz
rescue mode rescue mode
value like in low speed TR1.01 or less).
RES.02 Starting Specifies the percentage of
2.0-90.0 % 60%
voltage bus voltage at starting
TABLE 13.6

13.3.3.3. Process description

In this rescue mode (DSP-4 batteries), there is only one switching contactor: KPW. In normal mode, KPW is
closed. In rescue mode, KPW is open. This contactor controls the RST inverter’s input.

The sequence would be the following one:

1. Cut off the electrical flow.

2. KPW opens, shifting into rescue mode. In this rescue mode, neither the main board nor the inverter
is reset.

3. After about 6 seconds, the rescue begins.

4. When reaching the floor level, the control board opens contactors K1 and K2 and the inverter
displays error 0E.

5. The control board opens the doors.

6. After a certain time, about 1 minute, the control board leaves the rescue mode and shifts into
normal mode. At this moment, two things may happen:

- If there is still no electrical flow, the UPS will switch off and, therefore, the whole
controller.

- If the electrical flow has been restored, KPW will be reactivated, and the control board will
be available to carry out services in normal mode.

During the rescue execution, if the power supply is restored, KPW remains open, and the rescue operation is
carried out. After the rescue travel completion and 1 minute (point 6) is elapsed, the contactor KPW is
reactivated and the rescue mode is exited.

The batteries, whose charge is controlled by the CHARGER 48V unit, provide energy to the machine ONLY.
The UPS supplies power to all the other elements involved in rescue operation: control board, inverter,
machine brake, door operator, etc.

In regard with the inverter, the following scheme describes the rescue process, taking as a reference the
information provided by 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter on the console.

V0.01 – 04/2013 157 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

START

LED “EM” LIGHTS UP

NO RUN
Command

WITH DETECTION YES WITHOUT DETECTION

OF FAVORABLE OF FAVORABLE
DIRECTION DIRECTION
( RES.00 = 2 ) Rescue ( RES.00 = 1 )
Mode ?

In order to find out the

favorable direction, two
«short» travels are made
in every direction.

Upwards or Downwards, the

ó one which demands less
energy

When the lift reaches the level,

the control board will open the
contactors and will turn off
RUN input signal of the LED “EM” GOES OFF
inverter. +
Input Signal RUN
GOES OFF

FINISH

FIGURE 13.2

Two further remarks:

1. During all the rescue process, the rescue signal (XC3-20/23) will remain activated. If the rescue
signal input is deactivated during the process execution for more than 3 seconds, the inverter will
interrupt the rescue operation. If the signal is reactivated, the process will start from the beginning.

2. In rescue mode, the only voltage-free input of the main board connector (XC2/XC10) that 3VFMAC-
DSP 6P will consider is the RUN signal (#13), whose activation will determine the moment from
which the rescue service will be carried out. The speed will be the rescue speed and the direction will
depend on the rescue configuration (WITH or WITHOUT detecting favourable direction).

V0.01 – 04/2013 158 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.3.4. DSP-UPS Rescue (without batteries)

To check that a 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter is ready for an automatic rescue WITHOUT batteries, a series of
checks must be done at wiring and parameterisation.

The DSP-UPS automatic rescue (WITHOUT BATTERIES) applies to synchronous machines.

13.3.4.1. Wiring

To check that a 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter is ready for a DSP-UPS rescue WITHOUT BATTERIES, we must check
the power wiring section and the wiring of the voltage-free input of control signal for the rescue mode
activation.

Power stage

The connection points C2 and C3 must be joined by

means of a metal plate.

TERMINAL CONNECT CABLE

C2- 3VF With label… Ended with…
C3
C2 faston
C3/+CE/C2
+CE ring

F3 and F4 fuse holders must remain EMPTY, WITHOUT

FUSES.

Next to them, in the upper part, there is a female

XC12, Wago connector of 2 poles (XC12).
F3-F4
Connect the female 2-pole special connector to the
terminals labelled as S1-S2 in XC12 (400 Vac).

TERMINAL CONNECT CABLE

3VF With label … Ended with …
C1 (∅ according to
controller’s power)
C1 double faston
C1,- Rescue positive pole
CE (∅ 0.4, red)
-CE -CE (capacitors) faston/ring
-CE (rescue negative
-CE ring (fuse nut)
pole)

TABLE 13.7

VERY IMPORTANT: ANY ERROR OR FAILURE IN THE DISCRBED CONNECTIONS MAY LEAD TO A SHORT-
CIRCUIT AND/OR AN ELECTRICAL FAILURE THAT MAY ENDANGER THE SAFETY OF PEOPLE HANDLING THE
INVERTER, AND CAUSE AN IRREVERSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE DEVICE.

V0.01 – 04/2013 159 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

Control signal

There is a signal of voltage-free input through which the main board informs the inverter that the rescue
mode is activated.

This input is enabled through terminals 21-23 of connector XC3:

PICTURE 13.3

V0.01 – 04/2013 160 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.3.4.2. Parameterisation

PARAM NAME DESCRIPTION RANGE VALUE

0: Disabled
1: 3VF Rescue -5 batteries
enabled, WITHOUT
detecting favourable
direction
RES.00 Rescue mode Specifies the activation/deactivation and 3
2: 3VF Rescue -5 batteries
configuration of the rescue mode
enabled, WITH detecting
favourable direction
(recommended).
3: DSP-UPS Rescue (without
batteries).
RES.01 Speed in Specifies the speed in rescue mode 0.10..20.00 Hz
Acc. to
rescue mode Profile
Acceleration Acceleration time in rescue mode, stated Acc. to
RES.03 0.30..10.00 s
time in seconds. Profile
Only applies to rescue mode without
batteries (RES.00 = 3).
Final speed of initial speed ramp stated Acc. to
RES.04 Starting speed 0.01..5.00 Hz
in Hertz. Profile
Equivalent to parameter ARR.01, but in
rescue mode.
Only applies to rescue mode without
Acceleration batteries (RES.00 = 3).
Acc. to
RES.05 time at Time of initial ramp stated in seconds. 0.10..5.00 s
Profile
starting Equivalent to parameter ARR.01, but in
rescue mode.
Only applies to rescue mode without
batteries (RES.00 = 3).
With the aim of protecting and
guaranteeing the completion of the
Acc. to
RES.06 Rated current rescue, maximum output motor current 1.0..4.0 A
Profile
is limited to twice the amount entered in
this parameter.
Equivalent to parameter DRI.07, but in
rescue mode.
Maximum Only applies to rescue mode without batteries (RES.00
speed of = 3).
If, during the completion of a rescue, it shifts to Acc. to
RES.07 rescue by rescue mode by unbalanced load, maximum speed will 0.10..20.00 Hz
Profile
unbalanced be limited. If 18% of this value is exceeded, error 11
load will occur.

TABLE 13.8

V0.01 – 04/2013 161 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.3.4.3. Process Description

As already mentioned in parameter table of previous section, there are 2 parameters associated to the speed
during the rescue and 2 parameters associated to the acceleration time in rescue.

When the inverter shifts in rescue mode WITHOUT BATTERIES, the starting process that is launched consists
of two straight lines or acceleration ramps:

• Starting ramp: This first ramp is defined by parameters RES.04 and RES.05. This ramp is
equivalent to the starting ramp in normal mode determined by the parameters of ARR
group.
Its function is to overcome the starting friction.

• Acceleration ramp: Determined by parameters RES.01 and RES.03. Its function is to move
the car at the required speed in rescue mode.

FIGURE 13.3

At no time is there any mention of curves and, much less, of S curve, but of ramps and straight lines. The
rescue operation aim is to take the car to the floor level and open doors. To achieve this aim, the inverter
attempts to save the maximum possible energy and the comfort becomes secondary.

However, as a general rule, the rescue speed (RES.01) is set at around 12-15 % of the rated speed and the
time (RES.03) between 4 and 6 seconds. The final speed of the initial ramp (RES.04) is set at around 10% of
the rated speed and the time (RES.05) at about 1-2 seconds.

Parameter RES.06 (rated current during the rescue) will be used by the inverter to set the maximum current
limit of output to motor during the rescue operation at two times its value. Its value depends neither on the
machine nor on the inverter, but on the only power source during the rescue operation: the UPS. Its usual
value is 1.5 Amp, which limits the maximum current to the motor at 3 Amp. It is recommended not to modify
this parameter.

During the DSP-UPS rescue operation, the inverter tries to move the machine according to the speed targets
determined by the parameters of initial ramp and rescue ramp in the most favourable direction in terms of
energy.

Due to the position into the shaft and/or the load inside the car, it may happen that the lift is that unbalanced
that the inverter is not able to move the machine according to the target speed with only the power supplied
by the UPS, so that the lift real speed exceeds the target speed. Then, and only then, the inverter will operate
like the RESMON command: it will short the motor phases. Let us suppose that at this moment one of the
motor phases is accidentally disconnected. The circuit would open and the lift would accelerate. When the
speed exceeds the value set in parameter RES.07, the error 11 (overspeed) would appear.

The parameter RES.07 value is included in all the machines’ profiles. Usually, it is set at 50% de of the rated
speed.

In this rescue mode (DSP-UPS) THERE ARE NO SWITCHING CONTACTORS. That means less wiring and less
EMC noises. The sequence would the following one:

1. Cut off the electrical flow.

2. Shift into rescue mode. In this rescue mode, neither the control board nor the inverter is reset.

V0.01 – 04/2013 162 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
3. After about 3 seconds, the rescue travel begins.

4. When reaching the floor level, the control board opens contactors K1 and K2 and the inverter
displays error 0E.

5. The control board opens the doors.

6. After a certain time, about 1 minute, the control board leaves the rescue mode and shifts into
normal mode.

- If there is still no electrical flow, the UPS will switch off and, therefore, all the controller’s
elements.

- If the electrical flow has been restored, the control board will be available to carry out services in
normal mode.

During the rescue execution (at any moment of the sequence), if the power supply is restored, the rescue
operation is carried out. After the rescue travel completion and the time determined by the control board and
the parameterisation is elapsed, the system shifts into normal mode and it will be available to carry out
services in normal mode.

The UPS provides energy to the whole installation: machine, control board, inverter, machine brake, door
operator.

In regard with the inverter, the following scheme describes the rescue process, taking as a reference the
information provided by 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter on the console.

V0.01 – 04/2013 163 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
START

LED “EM” LIGHTS UP

NO RUN
Command

YES

Upwards or downwards, the

one selected as favorable
ó

It may happen that, due to the

position of the lift in the shaft and/or
the car load, the lift is so unbalanced
Inverter behaves as the Difference that the inverter cannot make the lift
YES between actual speed run at the target speed using as
RESMON box and target speed
too high power supply just the UPS.

ó NO

When the lift reaches the level,

the control board will open the
contactors and will turn off
RUN input signal of the
inverter. + LED “EM” GOES OFF
Input Signal RUN
GOES OFF

FINISH

FIGURE 13.4

Two further remarks:

1. During all the rescue process, the rescue signal (XC3-21/23) will remain activated. If the rescue
signal input is deactivated during the process execution for more than 3 seconds, the inverter will
interrupt the rescue operation. If the signal is reactivated, the process will start from the beginning.

2. In rescue mode, the only voltage-free input of the main board connector (XC2/XC10) that 3VFMAC-
DSP 6P will consider is the RUN signal (#13), whose activation will determine the moment from
which the rescue service will be carried out. The speed will be the rescue speed and the direction will
depend on the rescue configuration (WITH or WITHOUT detecting favourable direction).

V0.01 – 04/2013 164 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.4. A3 Amendment
A3 Amendment is a modification dated 2009 to the standard EN81-1, dated 1998, and reflected within the
section 9.11.

The A3 Amendment’s aim is the protection against unintended movement of the car when doors are open, as
reflected in the first section:

9.11.1 Lifts shall be provided with a means to stop unintended car movement away from the landing with
the landing door not in the locked position and the car door not in the closed position, as a result of failure
in any single component of the lift machine or drive control system upon which the safe movement of the
car depends, except failure of the suspension ropes or chains and the traction sheave or drum or sprockets
of the machine.

In addition, the standard states how and with which elements this movement detection has to be carried out,
on which elements we shall act or not, which would be the actions in front of this type of failure, the
maximum limits allowed, etc. For the integral text of the standard, refer to appendix C.

The A3 Amendment implementation is different depending on the machine type of the installation: with gear
(geared, asynchronous) or without gear (gearless, synchronous). The reason of this difference is reflected in
sections 9.11.3 and 9.11.4 of the standard:

9.11.3 The means shall be capable of performing as required without assistance from any lift component
that, during normal operation, controls the speed or retardation, stops the car or keeps it stopped, unless
there is built-in redundancy and correct operation is self-monitored.

NOTE Machine brake according 12.4.2 is considered to have built-in redundancy.

In the case of using the machine brake, self-monitoring could include verification of correct lifting or dropping
of the mechanism or verification of braking force. If a failure is detected, next normal start of the lift shall be
prevented.

Self-monitoring is subject to type examination.

9.11.4 The stopping element of the means shall act:

a) on the car, or

b) on the counterweight, or

c) on the rope system (suspension or compensating), or

d) on the traction sheave (e.g. on the sheave directly or on the same shaft in the immediate vicinity of
the sheave).

The stopping element of the means or the means keeping the car stopped may be common with those
used for:

- preventing overspeed in down direction,

- preventing ascending car overspeed (9.10).

The stopping elements of the means may be different for the down direction and for the up direction.

In the case of SYNCHRONOUS (without gear) machines, the brakes act on the traction pulley itself. In
addition, there are 2 brakes, so that the system is redundant and we can know their state through the
reading of brake microswitches. Therefore, we can use them to avoid unintended movement of the car.

The case of ASYNCHRONOUS (with gear) is different. The brake acts on the machine rotor (motor shaft), but
not on the traction pulley itself, so that this element cannot be used as stopping element.

However, the standard does allow that “…The stopping element of the means or the means keeping the car
stopped may be common with those used for preventing overspeed in down or up direction”. This is the
reason why, an interlocking device has been enabled on the overspeed governor. This device will be controlled
by 3VFMAC-DSP 6P.

Whatever the case, the inverter’s role, in regard with A3 Amendment, is the control of the stopping element.

V0.01 – 04/2013 165 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.4.1. A3 Amendment for asynchronous motors (ASYNC)

As already mentioned in previous section, in installations including asynchronous motors, the A3 Amendment
function has been implemented by using an interlocking device of the overspeed governor.

This device consists of an electromechanical coil activated by the inverter via the KRL1 output. In addition,
this device is provided with microcontact used by the inverter for its state monitoring via the 19 input of
connector XC2.

- When the inverter is in idle state, the coil keeps the overspeed governor interlocked. This way, if a
car unintended movement occurs, the overspeed governor will act to leave the lift interlocked.

- When the inverter is moving the machine, the coil releases the overspeed governor. This way, the
overspeed governor operates normally and acts in the event of overspeed.

The states of the KRL1 relay output and the XC2/19 input can be monitored through LEDs SP and 19,
respectively. The following table shows the two valid states, depending on whether the lift is stopped or
running.

LIFT Relay LED Input LED

STATE KRL1 SP XC2/19 19

STOPPED Deactivated OFF Activated ON

RUNNING Activated ON Deactivated OFF

TABLE 13.9

Any discrepancy between the state of the KRL1 output and the state of the XC2/19 input will incur in a
specific error associated to the A3 Amendment. These errors will be shown later in section 15.5.1.2.

The A3 Amendment function for ASYNCHRONOUS motors is available from version 911A on.

13.4.1.1. Parameters

The parameters associated to the A3 Amendment function are gathered in the group of parameters A3A. Their
description, range and default values are reflected in the following table:

DEFAULT
ID NAME DESCRIPTION RANGE
VALUES
This parameter specifies whether 0: Deactivated
A3A.00 A3 Amendment the function associated to A3 1: Activated, automatic reset 1
Activation
amendment is activated. 2: Activated, manual reset
Delay between uncontrolled
A3A.01 Time of
contactor opening and interlocking 1.00..10.00 s 4.00 s
interlocking
activation.
A3A.02 Time of release Maximum waiting time for the
0.10..2.50 s 1.20 s
activation of release output.
TABLE 13.10
* A3A.00: A3 Amendment Activation

Parameter A3A.00 determines the activation (A3A.00 = 1 or 2) or deactivation (A3A.00 = 0) of this function
in the inverter. This parameter has been included to enable the use of inverters with software version 911A
or higher in installations WITHOUT A3 Amendment.

If the A3 Amendment is deactivated, the KRL1 function will speed limit relay and the function of the XC2/19
input will be RESET OF ERROR.

If the A3 Amendment is activated, both functions, speed limit and RESET OF ERROR for KRL1 and XC2/19,
respectively, will be cancelled and they will take the required functions for the A3 Amendment function,
such as interlocking device control and reading of its state.

There are two modes for this function activation:

- A3A.00 = 1: A3 Amendment activated with “automatic reset”: Any other error associated to the A3
Amendment will be automatically reset by the inverter, with no need of the maintenance staff
intervention.

V0.01 – 04/2013 166 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

- A3A.00 = 2: A3 Amendment activated with “manual reset”: Any other error associated to the A3
Amendment will leave the inverter out of service. To reset this error, the maintenance staff
intervention is required and one of the following actions has to be carried out:

a) Enter SETUP and then exit.

b) Press the red button P/R of the console.
c) Switch off and on again the device.

The default value is 1 (function activated with automatic reset) as there are arguments against any one of
the other two options:

- IT IS NOT 2 because, according to certification bodies, the option of automatic reset (value 1)
complies with the standard. Thus, the inverter will never be out of service because of occasional
errors associated to A3 Amendment appeared.

But, if the certification bodies would change the criteria relating to this point in such a way that the
manual reset becomes compulsory, with just changing the value of one parameter it would be
enough.

- IT IS NOT 0 to avoid a possible interlocking of the lift.

If the function associated to A3 Amendment is implemented in the installation, but it is not enabled
in the inverter (A3A.00=0), the moment the lift starts moving, the interlocking will occur.

If the function associated to A3 Amendment is NOT implemented in the installation, but it is enabled
in the inverter (A3A.00=1), in idle state, error 30 (associated to A3 Amendment) will appear. All we
have to do is to deactivate the function (A3A.00=0).

VERY IMPORTANT
IF THE FUNCTION ASSOCIATED TO A3 AMENDMENT IS
IMPLEMENTED IN THE INSTALLATION, BUT IT IS DISABLED IN
THE INVERTER (A3A.00 = 0),

THE LIFT INTERLOCKING WILL OCCUR.

* A3A.01: Time of interlocking

Parameter A3A.01 or time of interlocking is the time elapsing between the contactors’ opening (out of the
stopping cycle) and the re-interlocking of the overspeed governor.

“Contactors’ opening of contactors out of the stopping cycle” means any contactors’ opening due to the
appearance of an error in the inverter or due to the detection of an opening in the safety chain.

By instance, the lift stopping in MES mode or INSPECTION mode is carried out when the control board
opens the safety chain, which incurs in error 0E in the inverter. A further example would be when, in
normal operation mode, a low voltage error (err 04) occurs during a travel.

In both cases, when detecting the error, the inverter deactivates its outputs of contactors (KRL2) and brake
(KRL3) and it stops supplying energy.

With ASYNCHRONOUS (GEARED) machines, the moment the lift starts braking (brake coils deactivated),
there is a small slipping of the rotor on the brake shoes. This slipping magnitude depends on a large
number of factors, like the shoe state, the brake power supply and its adjustment, el the counterweight
balance, etc. Therefore, the slipping time can vary from an installation to another one.

If the overspeed governor is interlocked while moving, the lift's interlocking would occur. This is the reason
why there is a time delay between the contactors’ opening and the re-interlocking of the overspeed
governor.

If the stopping is carried out according to the normal stopping cycle and without errors, meaning that the
brake closes with rotor stopped, this time delay does not happen.

* A3A.02: Time of release. This is the waiting time between KRL1 activation (overspeed governor released)
and the reading via XC2/19 input that the overspeed governor is released.

V0.01 – 04/2013 167 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.4.1.2. Errors

In the asynchronous version 911A, there are two errors associated to A3 Amendment and both are the result
of any discrepancy between KRL1 output state and XC2/19 input state (refer to table 13.4).

Error 30: Error of overspeed governor interlocking. The interlocking device of the overspeed governor
should be interlocking the governor, but the inverter understands it is not.

Check that KRL1 output is deactivated and XC2/19 input is activated.

Check that the governor is provided with the interlocking coil. If yes, check its power supply.

Error 31: Error of overspeed governor released. The overspeed governor coil should be releasing the
governor, but the inverter understands it is interlocked.

Check that KRL1 output is activated and XC2/19 input is deactivated.

If there is not any problem with the output or with the input, the lift has probably been
interlocked.

The behaviour of these errors is determined by parameter A3A.00 value, as already mentioned in previous
section:

A3A.00 = 1: Automatic reset. Both errors (30 and 31) are “infinite” or “uncountable”. The appearance
of any of them will NEVER leave the inverter in permanent out of service.

A3A.00 = 2: Manual reset. The appearance of any of them (30 or 31) will leave the inverter in
permanent out of service and will require a human intervention for reactivation.

13.4.2. A3 Amendment for synchronous motors (SYNC)

In installations provided with synchronous (without gear) machines, A3 Amendment implementation uses, like
stopping element, the two machine brakes that are acting directly on the traction pulley.

The main board takes part as a further element of the A3 Amendment implementation. Therefore, the board
must know, at all time, the inverter state. For this purpose, the KRL1 inverter output to one of the main board
inputs has been enabled, in such a way that if:

• KRL1 Activated: The inverter is available to carry out a service.

• KRL1 Deactivated: The inverter is NOT available to carry out a service. It may suffer an error, it
may be in programming mode or it may be switched off.

Thus, the main board remains informed at all time about the inverter state.

A3 Amendment function for SYNCHRONOUS motors is available from version 613 on.

13.4.2.1. Parameters

The parameters associated to the A3 Amendment function are gathered in the group of parameters A3A. Their
description, range and default values are reflected in the following table:

DEFAULT
ID NAME DESCRIPTION RANGE
VALUES
0: Deactivated
This parameter specifies whether 1: Activated,
A3A.00 A3 Amendment the function associated to A3 automatic reset 1
Activation
amendment is activated. 2: Activated,
manual reset
This parameter specifies the time
during which the brake
microswitch signal will be
A3A.01 Time of sampling analysed.
1.50..6.00 s 2.00 s
This parameter will only be
effective if A3A.00 has a value
different from zero (1 or 2).
TABLE 13.11

V0.01 – 04/2013 168 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

* A3A.00: A3 Amendment Activation

Parameter A3A.00 determines activation (A3A.00=1 or 2) or not (A3A.00=0) of this function in the inverter.
This parameter has been included to enable the use of inverters with software version 613 or higher in
installations WITHOUT A3 Amendment.

If A3 Amendment is deactivated (A3A.00=0), the KRL1 function will be the limit speed one and the function
of the XC2/19 input will be defined by the value of STC.08.

If this parameter value is different from zero (A3A.00 = 1 or 2), i.e., if A3 Amendment function is activated,
with or without automatic reset, then:

1) The KRL1 function as a limit speed relay is cancelled, leaving without effect some of the TR0.01
(speed limit) parameters and TR0.02 (speed limit logic) parameters.

2) Independently of the value set in parameter STC.08, the XC2/19 input is set out as reading of
normally closed brake microswitches.

VERY IMPORTANT

FOR THE A3 AMENDMENT IMPLEMENTATION, IT IS COMPULSORY THAT THE

NORMALLY CLOSED TERMINALS OF THE BRAKE MICROSWOTCHES ARE WIRED
IN SERIES.

There are two modes for this function activation:

- A3A.00 = 1: A3 Amendment activated with “automatic reset”: Any error associated to A3 Amendment
will be automatically reset by the inverter, with no need of an intervention from the maintenance staff.

- A3A.00 = 2: A3 Amendment activated with “manual reset”: Any error associated to A3 Amendment
will leave the inverter out of service. To Reset this error and intervention from the maintenance staff is
required and one of the following actions must be carried out:

a) Enter SETUP and, then exit.

b) Press the red button P/R of the console.
c) Switch off and on again the device.

The default value is 1 (function activated with automatic reset) as there as there are arguments against any
one of the other two options:

- IT IS NOT 2 because, according to certification bodies, the option of automatic reset (value 1)
complies with the standard. Thus, the inverter will never be out of service because of occasional
errors associated to A3 Amendment appeared.

But, if the certification bodies would change the criteria relating to this point in such a way that the
manual reset becomes compulsory, with just changing the value of one parameter it would be
enough.

- IT IS NOT 0 to avoid a possible interlocking of the lift.

If the A3 Amendment function is enabled in the main board, but disabled in the inverter (A3A.00 =
0), the KRL1 relay will not close, and the main board will understand that the inverter is not
available.

If the A3 Amendment function is enabled in the inverter and not in the main board, the KRL1 relay
will be closed or open, depending on the inverter state, but as this input is not connected to the main
board, its state would be irrelevant.

* A3A.01: Sampling time

Parameter A3A.01 is the time during which the brake microswitch signal will be analysed. Its functioning is
similar to a filter's one, because it specifies the sampling time required to validate the reading of brake
microswitches.

In addition, during this time, an analyse of the signal is carried out that enables noise detection at this
input.

V0.01 – 04/2013 169 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

13.4.2.2. Errors

There are two errors associated to A3 Amendment in the synchronous version 613:

Error 30: The machine brake should be closed, but the inverter reads as if it was open.

Error 32: Noise in reading of brake state. During A3A.01 seconds, the inverter analyses and
determines both the state and the signal quality of the brake microswitches.

The behaviour of these errors is determined by parameter A3A.00 value, as already mentioned in previous
section:

A3A.00 = 1: Automatic reset. Both errors (30 and 32) are “infinite” or “uncountable”. The appearance
of any of them will NEVER leave the inverter in permanent out of service.

A3A.00 = 2: Manual reset. The appearance of any of them (30 or 32) will leave the inverter in
permanent out of service and will require a human intervention for reactivation.

V0.01 – 04/2013 170 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

14. SOFTWARE UPDATING

In some cases, the software of the 3VFMAC-DSP 6P inverter will have to be updated.

If required or recommended, this operation must ONLY be carried by MP technical staff.

This process must be done with the software and hardware tools supplied by MP. Otherwise, MP will not be
responsible for any resulting consequences.

For this purpose, software called “Custom DSP Serial Flasher” is provided. This application includes a wizard
updating of the inverter firmware.
14.1. Requirements and needed elements
The requirements and needed materials to carry out this process are:

Computer: Minimum requirements:

• Operating System: Microsoft Windows® XP, Windows 7® or Windows Vista®.

• RAM Memory: 512Mb for Windows 7/Vista. 128Mb Windows XP
• Processor: Pentium®/Atom® 1GHz for Windows 7/Vista o 300 MHz for Windows XP
• Hard Disk: 6.36 Mb.

Recording Software: This software is supplied by MP. It must be previously installed. For further
details, refer to the manual associated to this application.

Inverter: A 6P inverter is required, with version 910 or higher for asynchronous motors and version
610A or 611A or higher for synchronous motors.

Additional elements:

MP supplies a complete kit, with code 2102RS232TTL, that includes:

• USB serial port.

• Cable crossover female-female DB9.
• RS232-UNIVERSAL Interface.
14.2. Process execution
• STEP 1: Double click the icon “Custom DSP Serial Flasher”

FIGURE 14.1

• STEP 2: If the USB-RS232 interface is not connected to the computer, the following message will
appear:

FIGURE 14.2

After the USB-RS232 interface is connected to any USB port, the application will automatically
detect it and move on to the next step.

V0.01 – 04/2013 171 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

• STEP 3: The following warning will appear:

FIGURE 14.3

Ensure the inverter is off. If not, switch it off.

Click the “OK” button and move to the next step.

• STEP 4: A window appears where there is a sequence of pictures showing which of the inverter
connectors is the PROGRAM connector, where it is located on the PCB and how to connect the
cable.

FIGURE 14.4

V0.01 – 04/2013 172 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

FIGURE 14.5

FIGURE 14.6

After the cable has been connected to the inverter in the right way and place, click the “OK”
button and move on to the next step.

V0.01 – 04/2013 173 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

• STEP 5: The following warning will appear:

FIGURE 14.7

Switch on the inverter, and then click the “OK” button.

• STEP 6: Wait the full completion of the recording process which consists of five phases:
Connecting, password, erasing, programming and verify.

FIGURE 14.8: Connection

V0.01 – 04/2013 174 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

FIGURE 14.9: Erasing

FIGURE 14.10: Programming

FIGURE 14.11: Verifying

V0.01 – 04/2013 175 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

If any error occurs during the process, a window like this one will appear:

FIGURE 14.12: Failure during the programming

This indicates in which process phase the error occurred. In most of the cases, the problems of
software updating have to do with connection problems. Then, a dialog box appears to inform
about the actions to be carried out:

FIGURE 14.13

If the process has been completed successfully and without errors, move on to the next step.

V0.01 – 04/2013 176 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

• STEP 7: The following warning will appear:

FIGURE 14.14

Disconnect the cable connected to the inverter, click the “OK” button and move on to the next step.

• STEP 8: The following warning will appear:

FIGURE 14.15

Check that the inverter is rebooting, click the “OK” button and move on to the next step.

V0.01 – 04/2013 177 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

• STEP 9: The following warning will appear:

FIGURE 14.16

Click the “YES” button and exit the application. At this moment, the USB-RS232 interface can be
disconnected from the computer.

If you click the “NO” button, the following window will appear:

FIGURE 14.17

V0.01 – 04/2013 178 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

There are three possible options:

- Click the “Record” button and start a new recording, moving on to the STEP 3.

- Click the “Exit” button and exit the application.

- Click the “Previous” button and move on to the next window:

FIGURE 14.18

VERY IMPORTANT

DO NOT MODIFY THE “FILE” FIELD UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED

FROM MP.

V0.01 – 04/2013 179 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

15. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

15.1. General features

Mains Uin input voltage 220 Vac; 400 Vac; -15% +10% three-phase
connection Input frequency 50 – 60 Hz
Mains connection Three-phase
Motor Motor type Induction Asynchronous motors, model 3VFMAC-DSP 6P A
connection Permanent magnet synchronous motors, model 3VFMAC-DSP 6P S
Output voltage 0 - Uin
Output rated current In 3VFMAC-DSP / 10 HP, 400 V: 17 Amps
3VFMAC-DSP / 10 HP, 220 V: 35 Amps
3VFMAC-DSP / 15 HP, 400 V: 26 Amps
3VFMAC-DSP / 20 HP, 400 V: 32 Amps
Maximum current of output (6 2 In (Switching frequencies from 5,5 to 10 KHz)
seconds) 1,5 In (Switching frequencies from 11 to 20 KHz)
Output frequencies 0 – 65 Hz
Distance between inverter and
motor
With Incremental Encoder TTL/RS 422: 7 metres
With Incremental Encoder TTL/RS 422 + Filter type EMIKON3036: 25 metres

With absolute Encoder sin/cos type Endat 1.0: 15 metres

With absolute Encoder sin/cos type Endat 1.0 + additional hardware: 25
metres
(Both ends of the shield have to be connected to ground)
Control Control features
characteristics
Open-loop control voltage/frequency
Closed-loop control with industrial encoder
Removal of the roll-back effect in starting by means of weight reading.

Control in closed-loop with industrial encoder

Position control starting/stopping (synchronous motors)
Switching frequency 5,5 - 20 KHz Asynchronous motors, by default 10 KHz
5,5 - 15 KHz Synchronous motors, by default 10 KHz
Acceleration time 0,5 - 10 seconds
Deceleration time 0,5 - 10 seconds
Curves of Starting and S-Curves with modification factor to model the profile and minimise the jerk
Stopping
Progressive starting Aimed to minimise the backpack frame jerks at starting
Environment Environment temperature of -10ºC (without frost) up to +55ºC
conditions operation
Storage temperature -20ºC up to +85ºC
Altitude 100% of the load capacity up to 1000 metres
Relative humidity 0 - 95%, no condensation, no corrosion, no dripping water
Protection class IP20 in front operation
EMC EMC Directive 2004/108/CE EN12016 Immunity
EN12015 Emission
Safety Low voltage Directive UNE-EN61010-1 Safety in electrical equipment
2006/95/CE
Machine Directive 2006/42/CE UNE-EN 60204-1 Safety in machines. electrical equipment in machines
Lifts Directive 95/16/CE UNE 81-1 Safety in lifts
Control Filter of contactor reading Reading of the contactor coil. Terminals (11, 12), 110V, +/- 10%
connections Connector XC13
CAN-BUS CAN-BUS 2.0B Communication Interface
Connector XC9
Commands Connector XC2:
11, Common
11-13, Starting
11-14, Rated speed (open: Approach)
11-15, Second speed
11-16, Normal (open: Inspection)
11-17, Second acceleration
11-18, Direction (open: Down / closed: Up)

11-19, Error reset

11-19, State reading of overspeed governor interlocking device (Amendment
A3/EN81)

11-19, Error reset

11-19, Reading of brake microswitches (synchronous)

V0.01 – 04/2013 180 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter
Rescue mode input signal Connector XC3 (20, 23)
Connector XC3
Encoder

Scope of application asynchronous motors

Incremental of square wave type ABZ. Power supply 5 Vdc
Interface TTL/RS 422, line driver
Minimum number of pulses 1024, maximum 5000, recommended 2000
Connector XC6 (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Scope of application synchronous motors

Absolute type sin/cos. Power supply 5 Vdc
Interface Type Endat 1.0
Number of pulses per turn 2048. Absolute 13 bits
Connector XC6 (1, 6, 7), XC8 (42, 41)
Connector XC5 (T1, T2), XC7 (T3, T4)
Output relays Contactors XC4 (34, 35)
Voltage-free output Brake XC4 (36, 37)
Speed limit (programmable logic). Connector XC4 (32, 33)
Brake resistor Connector faston B1, B2
Maximum distance 90 cm, shielded cable
The power ratings and their ohm values are described in the table of
resistors
Protections Hardware Protection fuse of power input (F1)
Protection fuse of power source of 10 Vdc (F2, 2 A)
Protection fuse of control area (F3, F4, 1 A)
Software Detection of overcurrent
Detection of high mains voltage (Model 400 V: Maximum 800 Vdc, Model
220 V: Maximum 394 Vdc)
Detection of low mains voltage (Model 400 V: Minimum 500 Vdc, Model 220
V: Minimum 176 Vdc)
Detection of encoder problems: connection, noise, turn direction
Detection of motor blocked (maximum current more than 6 s)
Detection of no connection in force terminals C1-C2
Detection of short-circuit
Detection of overtemperature of power module
Detection of motor not connected
Detection of overspeed (> 20% rated speed)
Detection of unbalance or absence of phases
Detection of failure in dc-link capacitor
Detection of non-controlled opening of contactors
Detection of errors in parameterisation
Detection of brake opening / non-controlled closing
Others Management of errors Up to 32 errors stored
PC and PDA tools MPConfig: Configuration and parameterisation
DSP Monitoring: Monitoring of Speed, Current and Voltage
DSP serial flasher: firmware recording
DSP Generator of sinusoidal S-curves
Adjustment and calibration Test function of encoder wiring
Test function and adjustment of current sensors in the installation

Test function of counterweight balance with no load8.

Autotuning function for machine and encoder with no load hanging from the
traction pulley.
Rescue Operation with emergency voltage for Rescue operation:
- 48 Vdc coming from batteries
- 220 Vac one-phase coming from UPS
TABLE 15.1

NOTE:
The switching frequency in open-loop mode is internally fixed to 10.0 KHz, independently of the value set
at “Switching Frequency” parameter. Any other switching frequency requires the closed-loop mode
operation.

8
In testing phase.

V0.01 – 04/2013 181 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

15.2. Models, resistors, capacitors and filters

15.2.1. Asynchronous inverters

MODEL RESISTOR
INSTALLATION Telemecanique
INPUT FILTER WITHOUT CAPACITORS OUTPUT FILTER
TYPE HP Vac CONTACTORS
SHIELD
2
2 x (2200 µF / 400 V) Section 4 and 6 mm , 8 turns
10 400 P0603007 40 Ω / 1040 W LC1D18FL
in SERIES in ferrite
2
2 x (3300 µF / 400 V) Section 4 and 6 mm , 8 turns
15 400 P0603008 30 Ω / 1400 W LC1D25FL
WITH MACHINE in SERIES in ferrite
2
ROOM 2 x (4700 µF / 400 V) Section 10 mm , 7 turns in
20 400 142-003 30 Ω / 4000 W LC1D38FL
in SERIES ferrite
2
2 x (2200 µF / 400 V) Section 10 mm , 7 turns in
10 230 142-003 14 Ω / 1040 W LC1D38FL
in PARALLEL ferrite
X-B1440-003
2 x (2200µF / 400V) Section 4 and 6 mm2, 8 turns
10 400 PREMO 40 Ω / 1040 W LC1D18FL
in SERIES in ferrite
142-015 EMIKON
2
X-B1440-004 2 x (3300 µF / 400 V) Section 4 and 6 mm , 8 turns
MACHINE 15 400 30 Ω / 1400 W LC1D25FL
PREMO in SERIES in ferrite
ROOM LESS
X-B1440-005 2 x (4700 µF / 400 V) Section 10 mm2, 7 turns in
20 400 30 Ω / 4000 W LC1D38FL
PREMO in SERIES ferrite
X-B1440-005 2 x (2200 µF / 400 V) Section 10 mm2, 7 turns in
10 230 14 Ω / 1040 W LC1D38FL
PREMO in PARALLEL ferrite
TABLE 15.2

15.2.2. Synchronous inverters

SYNCHRONOUS
MODEL RESISTOR
INSTALLATION Telemecanique
INPUT FILTER WITHOUT CAPACITORS OUTPUT FILTER
TYPE HP Vac CONTACTORS
SHIELD
Q=450, 630 Kg
40 Ω / 2200 W
2 x (2200 µF / 400 V) Section 4 and 6 mm2, 8 turns in
10 400 P0603007 --------- LC1D18FL
in SERIES ferrite
Q=1000 Kg
WITH MACHINE
40 Ω / 4400 W
ROOM
2 x (3300 µF / 400 V) Section 4 and 6 mm2, 8 turns in
15 400 P0603008 30 Ω / 4400 W LC1D25FL
in SERIES ferrite
2 x (4700 µF / 400 V) Section 10 mm2, 7 turns in
20 400 142-003 30 Ω / 8000 W LC1D38FL
en SERIE ferrite
Q=450, 630 Kg
X-B1440-003
40 Ω / 2200 W
PREMO 2 x (2200 µF / 400 V) Section 4 and 6 mm2, 8 turns in
10 400 --------- LC1D18FL
142-015 in SERIES ferrite
Q=1000 Kg
MACHINE EMIKON
40 Ω / 4400 W
ROOM LESS 2
X-B1440-004 2 x (3300 µF / 400 V) Section 4 and 6 mm , 8 turns in
15 400 30 Ω / 4400 W LC1D25FL
PREMO in SERIES ferrite
2
X-B1440-005 2 x (4700 µF / 400 V) Section 10 mm , and 7 turns in
20 400 30 Ω / 8000 W LC1D38FL
PREMO in SERIES ferrite

TABLE 15.3

VERY IMPORTANT

In installations including more than 16 levels, the power of resistors must be doubled, the cables
must be shielded and their length must not exceed 5 meters.

V0.01 – 04/2013 182 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

15.3. Model and power of the inverter according to gearless configurations

Maximum INVERTER
INSTALLATION Range of “Q” Speed MACHINE MODEL RUN COMPENSATING
P+Q CHAIN
TYPE (Kg) (m/s) MODEL (meters)
(Kg) Vac HP
Mago
MP GO 450 from 400 to 480 Kg 1450 1.00 400 10 50 > 27 Meters
100.2.240
Mago
MP GO 600 from 481 to 630 Kg 1600 1.00 400 10 50 > 27 Meters
125.2.240
Mago
MP GO 750 from 631 to 800 Kg 2000 1.00 400 10 50 > 27 Meters
150.2.240
Mago
2400 1.00 400 10 50 > 27 Meters
175.2.240
MP GO 1000 from 900 to 1000 Kg
Mago
2800 1.00 400 15 50 > 27 Meters
175.2.240
from 1001 to 1150 Mago
MP GO 1088 2800 1.00 400 15 50 > 27 Meters
Kg 200.2.240
from 1151 to 1275 Mago
MP GO 1250 2955 1.00 400 15 50 > 27 Meters
Kg 250.2.240

Mago
up to 180 Kg 730 1.00 400 10 50 > 27 Meters
100.1.240
Mago
from 181 to 225 Kg 825 1.00 400 10 50 > 27 Meters
125.1.240
Mago
from 226 to 300 Kg 950 1.00 400 10 50 > 27 Meters
150.1.240
Mago
15 No
175.1.240
from 301 to 375 Kg 1125 1.00 400 10
MP GO FLEX Mago
50 > 27 Meters
200.1.240
Mago
15 No
200.1.240
from 376 to 450 Kg 1350 1.00 400 10
Mago
50 > 27 Meters
225.1.240
Mago
from 451 to 525 Kg 1425 1.00 400 10 50 > 27 Meters
250.1.240
Mago
from 526 to 630 Kg 1530 1.00 400 10 50 > 27 Meters
275.1.240
Mago
18 No
125.1.320
up to 225 Kg 775 1.00 400V 10
Mago
50 > 27 Meters
150.1.320
Mago
18 No
150.1.320
from 226 to 300 Kg 900 1.00 400 10
Mago
50 > 27 Meters
175.1.320
Mago
18 No
200.1.320
WMR GEARLESS from 301 to 375 Kg 1025 1.00 400 10
Mago
50 > 27 Meters
225.1.320
Mago
18 No
225.1.320
from 376 to 450 Kg 1175 1.00 400 10
Mago
50 > 27 Meters
250.1.320
Mago
from 451 to 525 Kg 1400 1.00 400 10 50 > 27 Meters
250.1.320
Mago
from 526 to 630 Kg 1500 1.00 400 10 50 > 27 Meters
275.1.320

TABLE 15.4

The previous table applies to installations of average traffic (ED9 = 40%) and when the environment
temperature (Ta) is lower than 45ºC, with a switching frequency (fc) of 10 KHz. In any other type of
conditions, consult MP.

For any type of installation not reflected in the previous table, we must size the inverter in such a way that
the current and the power are higher than the ones of the selected machine. This increase will depend on the
ED, the performance, the switching frequency and the environment temperature of the installation. Should
you have any doubt, contact MP for support.

9
Empty Duty = Rango de utilización

V0.01 – 04/2013 183 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

APPENDIX A: PINOUT DEVICE NI USB-8473 A XC9 OF THE INVERTER

The device CAN NI USB 8473 is provided with a DB9 male connector with the following pinout:

those three poles are to be connected into XC9 Wago connector of the inverter according to following table:

PIN XC9 DB9

CAN_H 50 7
CAN_L 49 2
V- 48 3

V0.01 – 04/2013 184 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

APPENDIX B: PINOUT OF THE ABSOLUTE/SINUSOIDAL ENCODER ADAPTER CABLE

To connect the encoder to the invertor an adapter cable is required. The encoder adapter cable supplies the
connection interface between the machine encoder and the inverter.

PICTURE C.1
The machine encoder cable has a DB15 male connector at one end which must be connected to our DB15
female adapter cable.

The female connector of 3 poles “+/-“ will be connected to the power supply source of 5 Vdc. All the
remaining connectors will be connected to the inverter in the following way:

41, 42: 7-poles, in XC8

1, 6, 7: 7-poles, in XC6
T1, T2: 2-poles, in XC5
T3, T4: 2-poles, in XC7

The adapter cable pinout is shown in following table:

DB15
INVERTER
FEMALE
1 XC5/T2
2 XC5/T1
3 NC
POSITIVE
4
(5V)
NEGATIVE
5
(GND)
6 NC
7 XC8/41
8 NC
9 XC7/T3
10 XC7/T4
11 NC
12 XC6/6
13 XC6/7
14 XC8/42
15 NC
HOUSING XC6/1

TABLE C.1

FIGURE C.1

Note: As shown in the figure, the poles’ numbering of DB15 female connector, seen from the front, starts
from right to left. With housing, we mean the metal housing of the connector. Here, NC means “Not
Connected”.

V0.01 – 04/2013 185 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

APPENDIX C: EXTRACT OF EN81-1+A3 AMENDMENT

9.11 Protection against unintended car movement

9.11.1 Lifts shall be provided with means to stop unintended car movement away from the landing with the
landing door not in the locked position and the car door not in the closed position, as a result of a failure in
any single component of the lift machine or dive control system upon which the safe movement of the car
depends, except failure of the suspension ropes or chains and the traction shave or drum or sprockets of
the machine.

NOTE A failure of the traction sheave includes a loss of traction.

9.11.2 The means shall detect unintended movement of the car, shall cause the car to stop, and keep it
stopped.

9.11.3 The means shall be capable of performing as required without assistance from any lift component that,
during normal operation, controls the speed or retardation, stops the car or keeps it stopped, unless there is
built-in redundancy and correct operation is self-monitored.

NOTE Machine brake according 12.4.2 is considered to have built-in redundancy.

In the case of using the machine brake, self-monitoring could include verification of correct lifting or dropping of
the mechanism or verification of braking force. If a failure is detected, next normal start of the lift shall be
prevented.

Self-monitoring is subject to type examination.

9.11.4 The stopping element of the means shall act:

a) on the car, or

b) on the counterweight, or

c) on the rope system (suspension or compensating), or

d) on the traction sheave (e.g. on the sheave directly or on the same shaft in the immediate vicinity of
the sheave).

The stopping element of the means, or the means keeping the car stopped may be common with those used
for:

− preventing overspeed in down direction,

− preventing ascending car overspeed (9.10).

The stopping elements of the means may be different for the down direction and for the up direction.

V0.01 – 04/2013 186 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

9.11.5. The means shall stop the car in a distance:

− not exceeding 1,20 m from the landing where the unintended car movement has been detected, and

− the vertical distance between the landing sill and the lowest part of the car apron shall not exceed 200 mm, and

− the free distance from car sill to landing door lintel, or from landing sill to car door lintel shall not be less than
1,00 m (see Figure 4).

These values shall be obtained with any load in the car, up to 100 % of rated load.

Figure 4 − Unintended car movement

9.11.6 During the stopping phase, the stopping element of the means shall not allow a retardation of the car in
excess of:

− 1 gn for unintended movements in up direction,

− the values accepted for safety gears in down direction.

These values shall be obtained with any load in the car, up to 100 % of rated load, moving away from a standstill
position at landing level.

V0.01 – 04/2013 187 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 TECHNICAL MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT
3VFMAC-DSP 6P Frequency inverter

9.11.7 The unintended movement of the car shall be detected by at least one switching device at latest when
the car leaves the unlocking zone (7.7.1).

This switching device shall:

− either be a safety contact in conformity with 14.1.2.2, or

− be connected in such a way as to satisfy the requirements for safety circuits in 14.1.2.3, or

− satisfy requirements of 14.1.2.6.

9.11.8 The means shall operate an electric safety device in conformity with 14.1.2 if it is engaged.

NOTE This can be common to switching device of 9.11.7.

9.11.9 When the means has been activated or the self-monitoring has indicated a failure of the stopping
element of the means, its release or the reset of the lift shall require the intervention of a competent person.

9.11.10 The release of the means shall not require the access to the car or the counterweight.

9.11.11 After its release, the means shall be in a condition to operate.

9.11.12 If the means requires external energy to operate, the absence of energy shall cause the lift to stop and
keep it stopped. This does not apply for guided compressed springs.

9.11.13 The unintended car movement with open doors protection means is regarded as a safety component
and shall be verified according to the requirements in F.8.

V0.01 – 04/2013 188 MTELCVFDSP6P_001_EN

 www.mplifts.com

HEADQUARTERS

Pabellón MP
Leonardo Da Vinci, 15
Isla de la Cartuja – 41092 Sevilla
Tel. + 34 902 197 277
e-mail: elevacion@mpcorporacion.com